Contents
General Information 1
Industrial Ethernet Networks 2
Configuring Networks 3
Passive Components for
Electrical Networks 4
Passive Components for
Optical Networks 5
Active Components and
Topologies 6
Guidelines for Installing
Networked Automation
Systems in Buildings 7
Dimension Drawings 8
Installing Network
Components in Cubicles 9
Appendix
References A
Support and Training B
OLM/ELM Operating
Instructions
6GK1102–4AA00/6GK1102–5AA00 C
OSM/ORM Operating
Instructions
C79000–Z8976–C068–04 D
Glossary, Index
Edition 05/2001
SIMATIC NET
Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic
Networks
Manual
This manual has the order number
6GK1970–1BA10–0AA1
SIMATIC
C79000–G8976–C125–02
ii SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Classification of Safety-Related Notices
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to
protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning
triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
!Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
highlights important information on the product, using the product, or part of the documentation that is of
particular importance and that may have detrimental results if ignored.
Note
highlights important information on the product, using the product, or part of the documentation that is of
particular importance and that will be of benefit to the user.
Trademarks SIMATICR, SIMATIC HMIR and SIMATIC NETR are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
iii
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Safety Instructions Regarding your Product:
Before you use the product described here, read the safety instructions below thoroughly.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage of Hardware Products
Note the following:
!Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Before you use the supplied sample programs or programs you have written yourself, make certain that
no injury to persons nor damage to equipment can result in your plant or process.
EU Directive: Do not start up until you have established that the machine on which you intend to run this
component complies with the directive 89/392/EEC.
Correct Usage of Software Products
Note the following:
!Warning
This software may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description,
and only in connection with software from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens.
Before you use the supplied sample programs or programs you have written yourself, make certain that
no injury to persons nor damage to equipment can result in your plant or process.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the
hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded
entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this
manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcome.
Disclaimer of LiabilityCopyright E Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for
damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of
a utility model or design, are reserved.
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungstechnik
Geschäftsgebiet Industrie-Automatisierung
Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nürnberg Subject to technical change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft G79000-G8976-C125-02
iv SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
v
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1 General Information 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Symbols 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Local Area Networks in Manufacturing and Process Automation 1-4. . . . . . .
1.2.1 The SIMATIC NET Communication Systems 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Industrial Ethernet Networks 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Ethernet Standard IEEE 802.3 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Industrial Ethernet 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Fast Ethernet 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Switching 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Example of an Industrial Ethernet Network 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Configuring Networks 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Shared LANs (CSMA/CD Networks) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Fiber-Optic Links 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Industrial Twisted Pair Links 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 AUI Links 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Configuring the Entire Network (Collision Domains) 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Configuring an Industrial Ethernet Shared LAN 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Values for Delay Equivalents and Variability Values 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Bus Structure 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 OLM Bus Structure via Optical Fiber 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 Bus Structure Containing only ELMs 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 Combining OLMs and ELMs in a Bus Configuration 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 Redundant Ring Structure with OLMs 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.7 Combinations with Star Couplers and other Network Components 3-19. . . . .
3.3 Switched LANs 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Configuring an Electrical 100 Mbps Switched LAN 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Twisted-Pair Links 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 ESM Bus Structure 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Redundant Ring Structure with ESMs 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Configuring an Optical 100 Mbps Switched LAN 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Fiber-Optic Links 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 OSM Bus Structure 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Redundant Ring Structure with OSMs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Redundant Linking of Network Segments with OSMs/ESMs 3-31. . . . . . . . . . .
4 Passive Components for Electrical Networks 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Overview of Twisted-Pair Cables 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Industrial Twisted Pair Standard Cable 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 FastConnect (FC) Twisted-Pair Cables 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Twisted-Pair Cord 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) and
Twisted-Pair (TP) Cables 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.1 Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair Cables 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.5.2 Preassembled Twisted-Pair Cords 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.3 Twisted-Pair Port Converter 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D Connectors 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 RJ-45 Connector 4-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 4-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Passive Components for Optical Networks 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Optical Transmission Technique 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Glass Fiber-Optic Cables 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Fiber-Optic Standard Cable 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 INDOOR Fiber-Optic Cable 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Flexible Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Special Cables 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Connectors for Glass Fiber-Optic Cables 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Active Components and Topologies 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Electrical and Optical Link Modules (ELM, OLM) 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Components of the Product 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2 Installation 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3 Description of the Functions 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4 Topologies 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Optical and Electrical Switch Modules (OSM/ESM) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Application 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Design 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 Functions 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.4 Bus Topologies with the OSM/ESM 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.5 Redundant Ring Structure 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.6 Linking Subnets Using the OSM/ESM 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.7 Redundant Linking of Subnets Using the OSM/ESM 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.8 Components of the OSM/ESM 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.9 Network Management of the OSM/ESM 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 ASGE Active Star Coupler 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 MINI OTDE Optical Transceiver 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 Overview 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 The Product and Ordering Data 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3 Functions 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.4 Topologies with the MINI OTDE 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Mini UTDE Electrical Transceiver (RJ-45) 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 Overview 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2 The Product and Ordering Data 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3 Functions 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.4 Topologies with the Mini UTDE RJ-45 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings 7-1. . . . .
7.1 General Instructions on Networking with Bus Cables 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Protection from Electric Shock 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility of Bus Cables 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Measures to Counter Interference Voltages 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Equipotential Bonding System 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Requirements of the Power Distribution System 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4 Shielding Devices and Cables 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5 Special Noise Suppression Measures 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Arrangement of Devices and Cables 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 The Influence of Power Distribution Systems (EN 50174-2, 6.4.4.2) 7-18. . . .
7.4.2 Cable Categories and Clearances 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Cabling within Closets 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 Cabling within Buildings 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5 Cabling outside Buildings 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Mechanical Protection of Bus Cables 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility of Fiber-Optic Cables 7-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Installing LAN Cables 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.1 Instructions for Installing Electrical and Optical LAN Cables 7-26. . . . . . . . . . .
7.8 Additional Instructions on Installing Fiber-Optic Cables 7-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9 Fitting Twisted Pair Connectors 7-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 Installing and Wiring up the FC Outlet RJ-45 7-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11 Connecting Fiber-Optic Cables 7-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Installing Network Components in Cubicles 8-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 IP Degrees of Protection 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 SIMATIC NET Components 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Dimension Drawings 9-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Optical Link Module (OLM) and Electrical Link Module (ELM) 9-2. . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Optical Switch Module (OSM) 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Electrical Switch ModuleESM 9-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 ASGE Active Star Coupler 9-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 Optical Transceiver 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 Mini UTDE RJ-45 Electrical Transceiver 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7 Connectors 9-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8 Front View of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45 9-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.9 Side View of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45 9-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A References A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B SIMATIC NET – Support and Training B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Support, Technical Support B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Glossary Glossar-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations
Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reply Form
C OLM/ELM Operating Instructions C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D OSM/ORM Operating Instructions D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
General Information
Chapter Overview
1.1 Symbols 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Local Area Networks in Manufacturing and Process Automation 1-4. . . . . . .
1.2.1 The SIMATIC NET Communication Systems 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
General Information
1-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1.1 Symbols
Twisted-pair cable
Duplex fiber-optic cable
Industrial Ethernet triaxial cable
727-1 drop cable
MINI OTDE optical transceiver (BFOC)
Transceiver
Terminating resistor for triaxial cable
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Active star coupler (ASGE) with ECTP3 and ECFL2
Industrial Ethernet ELM (Electrical Link Module)
Industrial Ethernet OLM (Optical Link Module)
Industrial Ethernet OSM (Optical Switch Module)
Industrial Ethernet ESM (Electrical Switch Module)
OLM
ELM
OSM ITP62
ESM ITP80
Mini UTDE electrical transceiver (RJ-45)
Industrial Ethernet ESM (Electrical Switch Module)
ESM TP80
General Information
1-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Ê
SIMATIC S7-400
SIMATIC S7-300
Operator panel (OP)
Programming device (PG)
Printer
Personal Computer (PC)
General Information
1-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1.2 Local Area Networks in Manufacturing and Process Automation
General
The performance of control systems is no longer simply determined by the
programmable logic controllers, but also to a great extent by the environment in
which they are located. Apart from operator control and monitoring, this also
means a high-performance communication system.
Distribution in Manufacturing and Process Automation
Distributed automation systems are being used increasingly in manufacturing and
process automation. This means that a complex control task is divided into smaller,
clearly delineated subtasks with distributed control systems. As a result, efficient
communication between the distributed systems is an absolute necessity. Such
distributed structures have, for example, the following advantages:
SIndependent and simultaneous startup of individual sections of a plant or
process
SSmaller, clearer programs
SParallel processing by distributed automation systems (programmable
controllers)
This results in the following:
- Shorter reaction times
- Reduced load on the individual processing units
SIncreased plant or process availability
A comprehensive, high-performance communication system is a must for a
distributed system structure. The basis of such communication systems are Local
Area Networks (LANs) that can be implemented in one of the following ways:
SElectrically
SOptically
SAs an electrical/optical combination
General Information
1-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
What Does SIMATIC NET Stand For?
With SIMATIC NET, SIEMENS provides open, heterogeneous communication
systems for the various levels of process automation in an industrial environment.
The communication systems are based on national and international standards
according to the ISO/OSI reference model.
SIMATIC NET includes the following:
SThe communication network consisting of the transmission media, medium
attachment and transmission components, and the appropriate transmission
techniques
SProtocols and services for data transmission between the devices mentioned
above
SThe modules of the programmable logic controller or computer that establish a
connection to the communication network (communications processors “CPs”)
General Information
1-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1.2.1 The SIMATIC NET Communication Systems
To handle the wide variety of tasks in automation engineering, SIMATIC NET
provides different communication networks to suit the particular situation.
The topology of rooms, buildings, factories, and complete company complexes and
the prevalent environmental conditions mean different requirements.
The networked automation components also make different demands on the
communication system. To meet these various requirements, SIMATIC NET
provides the following communication networks complying with national and
international standards:
SAS-interface
The Actuator-Sensor interface (AS-i) for automation at the lowest
automation level for connecting binary actuators and sensors to programmable
controllers via the AS-i bus cable.
SPROFIBUS
A communication network for the cell and field area complying with the
PROFIBUS standard EN 50170-1-2 or IEC 61158-2 with the hybrid medium
access technique token bus and master-slave. This network is operated on a
twisted-pair or fiber-optic cable.
SIndustrial Ethernet
A communication network for the cell area using baseband technology
complying with IEEE 802.3 and using the CSMA/CD medium access method.
The network is operated at a transmission rate of 10 Mbps on triaxial cable,
glass fiber-optic cable, or shielded twisted pair cable.
SFast Industrial Ethernet
A communication network with a transmission rate of 100 Mbps.
This network is implemented using glass fiber-optic cable or shielded twisted
pair cable.
The various SIMATIC NET communication systems can be used alone or
combined with the other systems.
2-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Industrial Ethernet Networks
Chapter Overview
2.1 Ethernet Standard IEEE 802.3 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Industrial Ethernet 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Fast Ethernet 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Switching 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Example of an Industrial Ethernet Network 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Communication in an Industrial Environment
The requirements of communication in an industrial environment differ significantly
from those of conventional office communication. This affects practically all
aspects of communication, such as active and passive network components,
attached DTEs, network concepts/topologies, availability, data traffic, and
environmental conditions, to name but a few.
There are also network protocols optimized specifically for industrial
communication, although recently TCP/IP, a classic protocol from office
communication has started to gain ground in manufacturing and process control.
Industrial Ethernet - Designed for Industry
The basic idea behind Industrial Ethernet is to use existing standards (Ethernet
network standards IEEE 802.3) and to add necessary and useful details
specifically for industrial communication.
This results in products with properties adapted to the requirements of a
manufacturing and process environment: Industrial Ethernet - Designed for
Industry.
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
2.1 Ethernet Standard IEEE 802.3
IEEE Standard 802.3
The international “Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)” specified
the first Ethernet standard 10BASE5 /1/ in 1985. This standard based on coaxial
cable as the transmission medium was the basis for the first Industrial Ethernet.
Under the name SINEC H1, this network, enhanced by the introduction of a triaxial
cable, has proved itself for many years in process and manufacturing automation
/6/.
From the very beginning, both the IEEE standard and the SIMATIC NET range of
products have constantly been improved and expanded, further increasing the
flexibility and performance of Ethernet networks. These expansions and
improvements include, for example, the introduction of transmission on fiber-optic
cables and twisted-pair cables and the introduction of Fast Ethernet increasing the
transmission rate by a factor of 10.
The common basis of all these Ethernet versions is baseband signaling and the
CSMA/CD medium access protocol.
Baseband Signaling
According to IEEE 802.3, Ethernet uses the baseband signaling technique. This
means that data is transmitted unmodulated in pulse form on the transmission
medium (for example bus cable). The transmission medium forms a single
transmission channel whose capacity must be shared by the attached DTEs. All
attached DTEs receive the data transmitted on the medium at the same time. At
any one time, only one single DTE is permitted to send data. If more than one DTE
sends data at the same time, a collision occurs on the transmission medium. The
data signals of the DTEs attempting to transmit destroy each other.
Coordinated access to the common transmission medium is obviously necessary.
The IEEE 802.3 standard solves this problem using the CSMA/CD protocol.
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Network Access Using the CSMA/CD Protocol
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detect) is also known as
Listen While Talk (LWT).
This is a distributed access technique; in other words, each DTE connected to the
network has the same access rights.
If a DTE wants to send data, it first “listens” to the medium to find out whether
another DTE is already transmitting. If no other DTE is transmitting, it can start its
transmission. If the DTE detects that the transmission medium is being used by a
different DTE, it must wait until the medium is free again.
All DTEs listen to the data transmitted. Based on the destination address
information in the data, a DTE recognizes whether or not it should receive the
data.
If more than one DTE wants to send at the same time and they all detect that the
medium is free, they start to transmit. After a brief time, the transmitted data will
collide.
The DTEs have a mechanism that allows them to detect such collisions. All the
DTEs involved in the collision then stop transmitting, wait for a random time
calculated differently for each individual DTE, and then attempt to send the data
again. This is repeated until one DTE succeeds in transmitting without a collision.
The others then wait until the transmission medium is free again.
Collision Domain
To make sure that the CSMA/CD access technique functions correctly, the span of
an Ethernet network is limited by the maximum permitted propagation time of a
data packet. The distance within which the CSMA/CD protocol functions perfectly
is known as the collision domain. In the classic 10 Mbps Ethernet, the collision
domain is a span of 4520 m. The configuration rules resulting from these
restrictions can be found in the section “Network Configuration”.
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
2.2 Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Twisted Pair (10BASE-T)
Industrial Twisted Pair is based on the Twisted-Pair standard IEEE 802.3i
(10BASE-T) /3/ and operates at a transmission rate of 10 Mbps.
The transmission medium is a shielded cable with two twisted pairs with a
characteristic impedance of 100 ohms. It is terminated according to the 10BASE-T
standard with RJ-45 connectors. As an alternative, sub-D connectors are also
available in the SIMATIC NET product range.
Twisted pair connections are always end-to-end connections between two
electrically active components. This means that there is always a direct link from
one DTE to a port of a network component. The network component is responsible
for regenerating received signals and distributing them by outputting the data again
to all output ports. In the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet network, these tasks
are handled by the OLM, ELM, OSM, and ESM network components. The
maximum length of the link between a DTE and network component (known as the
link segment) must not exceed 100 m.
Fiber Optic (10BASE-FL)
The fiber-optic variant for the 10 Mbps transmission rate in Industrial Ethernet is
based on the IEEE 802.3i standard (10BASE-FL) /4/.
The transmission medium is a multimode fiber-optic cable with glass fibers of the
type 62.5/125 µm or 50/125 µm.
Fiber-optic links are always end-to-end links between two active components. This
means that there is always a direct link between a network component and a port
of another network component. One network component is responsible for
regenerating received signals and distributing them by outputting the data again to
output ports. In SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet networks, this task is handled by
the OLM network component.
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
2.3 Fast Ethernet
Fast Ethernet /5/ has the essential features of the classic Ethernet standard with a
data rate increased by a factor of 10 to 100 Mbps. The data format, the CSMA/CD
protocol and the glass fiber-optic cables and category 5 twisted-pair cables are
identical in both systems.
SIMATIC NET products support the following Fast Ethernet specifications:
–100BASE-TX over category 5 twisted-pair cable (two pairs)
–100BASE-FX over fiber-optic cable (2 fibers)
Table 2-1 Ethernet/Fast Ethernet Compared
Ethernet Fast Ethernet
IEEE standard 802.3 802.3u
Data rate 10 Mbps 100 Mbps
Duration of a bit 100 ns 10 ns
Access technique CSMA/CD
Longest packet 1518 bytes
Shortest packet 64 bytes
Address field length 48 bits
Topology star, tree, bus
Table 2-1 Ethernet/ Fast Ethernet in SIMATIC NET
Ethernet Fast Ethernet
Supported media Coax: 10BASE5
Twisted pair: 10BASE-T
FO: 10BASE-FL Twisted pair: 100BASE-TX
FO: 100BASE-FL
Network components Transceivers
OLM
ELM
ASGE
Mini UYDE
Mini OTDE
OSM
ESM
Max. length of a TP trunk
segment 100 m 100 m
Max. length of an FO trunk
segment Multimode: 3000 m Multimode: 3000 m
Single mode: 26 km
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Industrial Twisted Pair (100BASE-TX)
Fast Ethernet over twisted pair is based on the standard IEEE 802.3u
(100BASE-TX) /5/ and operates at a transmission rate of 100 Mbps. The
transmission medium is a shielded cable with two twisted pairs with a characteristic
impedance of 100 ohms. The transmission properties of this cable must meet the
requirements of category 5 cabling (see Glossary). The maximum length of the link
between a DTE and network component (known as the link segment) must not
exceed 100 m. Termination is according to the 100BASE-TX standard with RJ-45
connectors, as an alternative, sub-D connectors are available in the SIMATIC NET
product range.
Twisted pair connections are always end-to-end connections between two
electrically active components. This means that there is always a direct link from
one DTE to a port of a network component. The network component is responsible
for regenerating received signals and distributing them by outputting the data again
to output ports. In SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet networks, this task is handled
by the OSM and ESM network components.
Fiber Optic (100BASE-FX)
The fiber-optic variant for 100 Mbps transmission rate in Industrial Ethernet is
based on the IEEE 802.3u standard (100BASE-FX) /5/. The transmission medium
is a multimode fiber-optic cable with glass fibers of the type 62.5/125 µm or 50/125
µm or a single mode fiber-optic cable with glass fibers of the type 10/125 µm.
Fiber-optic links are always end-to-end links between two active components. This
means that there is always a direct link between a network component and a port
of another network component. One network component is responsible for
regenerating received signals and distributing them by outputting the data again to
output ports. In the optical SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet network, these tasks
are handled by the Optical Switch Module (OSM) network component.
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
2.4 Switching
Basic Principles of Switching
Switches forward data packets directly from the input port to the output port based
on the address information in the data packet. Switches allow, as it were, a direct
interconnection.
A switch has essentially the following functions:
SConnecting Collision Domains / Subnets
Since repeaters and hubs (star couplers) function at the physical layer, their use
is restricted to the span of a collision domain.
Switches interconnect collision domains. Their use therefore is not restricted to
the maximum span of a repeater network. Switches actually permit very large
networks to be implemented with spans of up to 150 km.
SLoad Containment
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) addresses, local data
traffic remains local. In contrast to repeaters or hubs, which distribute data
unfiltered to all ports / network nodes, switches operate selectively. Only data
intended for nodes in other subnets is switched from the input port to the
appropriate output port of the switch.
To make this possible, a table assigning Ethernet (MAC) addresses to output
ports is created by the switch in a “teach-in” mode.
SLimitation of Errors to the Network Segment Affected
By checking the validity of a data packet on the basis of the checksum which
each data packet contains, the switch ensures that bad data packets are not
transported further. Collisions in one network segment are not passed on to
other segments.
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
SParallel Communication
Switches have the capability of handling multiple data packets between different
network segments or nodes simultaneously.
Depending on the number of ports the switch has, it establishes several
temporary and dynamic links between different pairs of network
segments/terminals.
The result is an enormous increase in the network’s data throughput, and a
considerable increase in network efficiency.
networkto approx. 40%
LAN
Segment A
Segment B
Segment C
Segment D
LAN
Segment A
Segment B
Segment C
Segment D
Data traffic
Switched LAN Shared LAN
SEach individual segment has the full
range of performance / data rate
SSimultaneous data traf fic in several
segments; several frames
SFiltering:
Local data remains local; only
selected packets go beyond segment
limits
SAll nodes on the network share the
network performance / data rate
SCollisions reduce the efficiency of the
network to approx. 40%
SAll data packets pass through all
segments
SAt any one time, only one frame on
the network
Figure 2-1 Switched LAN / Shared LAN Compared
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
2.5 Example of an Industrial Ethernet Network
Figure 2-2 shows an example of the combination of different technologies and
generations of Industrial Ethernet products in one network.
Network 1
In the high-speed network 1, four OSMs form a redundant ring with 100 Mbps
transmission capacity. If the connected DTEs or network components are suitably
designed, the twisted-pair ports of the OSMs can also be operated at 100 Mbps.
Since OSMs operate as switches, only the maximum lengths of the individual port
connections need to be taken into account during configuration (100 m twisted pair,
3000 m fiber optic).
Network 2
Network 2 also forms a redundant ring. The OLM and star coupler ASGE network
components operate at 10 Mbps using the CSMA/CD medium access method. The
maximum lengths of the individual port connections are limited to 100 m for twisted
pair and 3100 m for fiber-optic between two OLMs. The limits of the collision
domains (max. possible signal propagation time between two nodes) must also be
kept to.
Network 3
Network 3 represents a small system that has existed for years and that is based
on triaxial cable. A SIMATIC NET ELM allows the system to be connected to a
modern large network with switching technology.
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-11
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Example of an Industrial Ethernet Network
ELM
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ELM
OLM OLM
OLM
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
1. ITP standard 9/15
2. TP XP Cord
3. TP Cord 9/RJ-45
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
45
4. 727-1 drop cable
5. Triaxial cable
6. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
6
OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Network 1 Network 2
Network 3
OSM ITP62
OSM in the
RM mode
Figure 2-2 Network Structure with Industrial Ethernet Network Components
Industrial Ethernet Networks
2-12 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Configuring Networks
Chapter Overview
3.1 Shared LANs (CSMA/CD Networks) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Fiber-Optic Links 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Industrial Twisted Pair Links 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 AUI Links 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Configuring the Entire Network (Collision Domains) 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Configuring an Industrial Ethernet Shared LAN 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Values for Delay Equivalents and Variability Values 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Bus Structure 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 OLM Bus Structure via Optical Fiber 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 Bus Structure Containing only ELMS 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 Combining OLMs and ELMs in a Bus Configuration 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 Redundant Ring Structure with OLMs 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.7 Combinations with Star Couplers and other Network Components 3-19. . . . .
3.3 Switched LANs 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Configuring an Electrical 100 Mbps Switched LAN 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Twisted-Pair Links 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 ESM Bus Structure 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Redundant Ring Structure with ESMs 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Configuring an Optical 100 Mbps Switched LAN 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Fiber-Optic Links 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 OSM Bus Structure 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Redundant Ring Structure with OSMs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Redundant Link Between Two Network Segments with OSM/ESM 3-31. . . . .
3
Configuring Networks
3-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.1 Shared LANs (CSMA/CD Networks)
Shared LAN
The main feature of shared LANs is that all attached components share the
bandwidth of the transmission medium. At any one time, there can only be one
data packet in transit through the network. All data packets pass through all
segments. One station sends while all others receive. The station obtains the right
to send according to the CSMA/CD medium access method. The products that
operate according to the CSMA/CD medium access method and therefore form
shared LANs include the OLM/ELM, Mini UTDE, Mini OTDE, ASGE star coupler.
Using these components, it is possible to create bus, star and ring structures. The
rules for the network configuration are explained in this chapter. In this respect, it is
advisable to make a distinction between the length restrictions of individual
fiber-optic, twisted pair or AUI links dictated by attenuation characteristics and the
limits of the entire network span (collision domain) as dictated by the Ethernet
principle.
Note
For detailed information about configuring, installing, and operating components of
the SIMATIC NET triaxial network, refer to the manual for triaxial networks
(German/English, order number 6GK1 970-1AA20-0AA0)
3.1.1 Fiber-Optic Links
The optical ports of the OLM, Mini OTDE, ECFL2, and ECFL4 (interface cards for
the ASGE) comply with the IEEE 802.3j: 10BASE-FL standard. This means that
these ports can be linked in any combination.
The ideal media for these links are multimode glass fibers of the type 50/125 µm or
62.5/125 µm.
The length of the FO link that can be inserted depends on the optical power budget
available and the optical power loss at a wavelength of 850 nm.
FO Link Power Budget
A fiber-optic link power budget is available between the transmitter and receiver on
a fiber-optic link.
This represents the difference between the optical power coupled into a particular
fiber by an optical transmitter and the input power required by an optical receiver
for problem-free signal recognition.
Configuring Networks
3-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Optical Budget in SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet (10BASE-FL)
The 10BASE-FL optical ports operate at a wavelength of 850 nm. In Industrial
Ethernet, the following optical budget is available:
S50/125 µm fiber: 8 dBm
S62.5/125 µm fiber: 11 dBm
This power budget can be “used up” as power loss through the fiber-optic
transmission path.
Optical Power Loss
The optical power loss is the cumulative value of all the losses occurring in the
fiber-optic transmission path. These losses can be attributed mainly to the
following causes:
SPower loss within the fiber itself at a wavelength of 850 nm (refer to the
technical specifications of the particular fiber)
SPower loss caused by splices (approximately 0.2 dB per splice)
SPower loss caused by connectors (approximately 0.4 dB per connector)
The values in brackets are approximate values that can be used as a guideline
when configuring a network. The actual link loss should always be checked after
the link has been installed using a power loss measuring device.
If the power loss is equal to or lower than the power budget, the planned fiber-optic
link can be implemented.
The optical power is generally specified in dBm. The dBm unit describes the
logarithmic power ratio to the reference power 1 mW.
Power losses of fibers and splices or connectors are specified in dB.
Configuring Networks
3-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
SIMATIC NET Glass Fiber-Optic Cables
The SIMATIC NET product range for Industrial Ethernet includes various types of
glass fiber-optic cables with 62.5/125 µm fibers (see “Passive Components for
Optical Networks”).
When connecting SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet network components linked
with SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables, the maximum length of the link is
limited as shown in the table below:
Table 3-1 Maximum length of a link with fiber type G 62.5/125 µm between two optical
network components complying with 10BASE-FL (850 nm)
Fiber-Optic Cables FO power loss
At 850 nm Available budget Max. length
Standard fiber-optic cable <=3.1 dB/km 11 dB 3,500 m
INDOOR fiber-optic
cable <=3.5 dB/km 11 dB 3,100 m
Flexible fiber-optic
trailing cable <=3.1 dB/km 11 dB 3,500 m
SIENOPYR duplex FO marine
cable <=3.1 dB/km 11 dB 3,500 m
3.1.2 Industrial Twisted Pair Links
A twisted pair link is limited to a maximum of 100 m. This link can include a
maximum of 10 m patch cable (TP Cord). This can be implemented with the
following SIMATIC NET twisted-pair cables:
Table 3-2 Max. Cable Lengths with Twisted-Pair Cables
Cable Structure Cable Type Max.
length Max. Total of the Patch
Cables (TP Cord)
In one piece ITP standard 2x2
(with sub-D
connectors)
100 m –
Structured FC standard cable
FC trailing cable
FC marine cable
(connected to RJ-45
FC outlet)
90 m
75 m
75 m
10 m
10 m
10 m
Configuring Networks
3-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.1.3 AUI Links
According to the “Ethernet” standard IEEE 802.3 /1/ , a maximum length of 50 m is
permitted for AUI links.
Note
When using a CP 1511, the maximum cable length of the AUI link is restricted to
40 m!
3.1.4 Configuring the Entire Network (Collision Domains)
The network span of an Industrial Ethernet network is restricted by the limited
signal propagation time required for the CSMA/CD collision mechanism and by the
need to maintain a minimum gap between two data packets.
Delay Equivalent
The CSMA/CD collision mechanism of a local area network complying with IEEE
802.3 requires a limited signal propagation time. This means that the physical span
of a network (collision domain) is also restricted. Due to the signal propagation
time, a maximum of 4520 m is possible between any two DTEs. Each network
component has a delay equivalent which means a reduction in the maximum value.
The delay equivalent describes the signal delay caused by a component in the
signal path. The value of the signal delay is specified in meters instead of seconds.
The value in meters corresponds to the distance that a signal could travel in this
time if the signal propagated along a cable instead of through the component. The
total of all delay equivalents must be deducted from the overall budget (4520 m).
The remainder of the budget is available for cabling of the individual components.
In this case, it does not matter whether the cabling is optical fiber, Industrial
Twisted Pair, triaxial cable, drop cable etc.
Configuring Networks
3-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Variability Value and Path Variability Value
In a local area network complying with IEEE 802.3, two data packets must have a
certain minimum gap between them. If the gap is smaller, this is known as an
interframe gap error.
The variability value of a component describes the fluctuations in the propagation
time of a data packet through a network component. If two data packets pass
through several network components one after the other, the gap between the
packets is reduced. The sum of the values of all components is the Path Variability
Value (PVV). The PVV on the path between two DTEs must not exceed 40 bit
times (BT); in other words, the gap between packets can be reduced by a
maximum of 40 bit times. This value includes a safety margin that includes, among
other things, the variability value of the first MAU (Medium Attachment Unit, for
example a twisted pair transceiver integrated in the DTE).
By maintaining this maximum value, a minimum gap between the data packets is
guaranteed allowing correct recognition of the data packets. The transceiver that is
possibly connected to the remote, second DTE does not contribute to the reduction
in the interframe gap.
Points to bear in mind when configuring a network:
1. Check your network for critical connection paths. Critical paths are those in
which the signal runs through long sections of cable and a lot of network
components between two nodes.
2. If you consider a connection path to be critical, check the permitted span (delay
equivalents). The sum of the cable lengths between two nodes + the sum of the
delay equivalents of the network components between the two nodes must not
exceed 4520 m.
3. Check any critical paths to ensure that the maximum path variability values
(PVV) are kept to. The sum of the variability values of the network components
between to stations must not exceed 40 bit times.
4. For correct configuration complying with IEEE 802.3, all the paths must satisfy
these conditions.
Note
When using Industrial Ethernet OSMs/ESMs, the delay equivalent and the path
variability value only need to be checked as far as the port of an OSM/ESM, since
the collision domain starts and ends here.
Configuring Networks
3-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.2 Configuring an Industrial Ethernet Shared LAN
The following components and cables are used in an Industrial Ethernet network:
SComponents
– OLM/ELM
–Star coupler with interface cards
–MINI OTDE
SCables
–Fiber-optic cables
–Twisted-pair cable, TP Cord
–Triaxial cable
3.2.1 Values for Delay Equivalents and Variability Values
To check the two requirements above, you require the values of the delay
equivalent and the variable value of each individual component. These are
illustrated for the most important components in the tables below.
Optical Link Module (OLM)
Port 1 Port 2 Delay Equivalent Variability Value
FO FO 260 m 3 BT
FO ITP 360 m 6 BT
ITP ITP 190 m 3 BT
Electrical Link Module (ELM)
Port 1 Port 2 Delay Equivalent Variability Value
ITP ITP 190 m 3 BT
AUI ITP 190 m 3 BT
Configuring Networks
3-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Optical Star Coupler Cards
Interface Card Delay Equivalent Variability Value
ECFL 2 170 m *) **)
ECFL 4 130 m *) **)
Electrical Star Coupler Cards
Interface Card Delay Equivalent Variability Value
ECAUI 165 m *) **)
ECTP 3 55 m *) **)
UYDE 170 m *) **)
* The specified delay equivalents of the star coupler cards relate to only
one port (input or output), in contrast to the calculation for the OLM/ELM.
If, for example, there is a change from ECFL2 to ECTP3 at a star coupler,
the 170 m of the ECFL2 and the 55 m of the ECTP3 must be added. This
also applies when the changeover is between the two ports of the same
module, in this case the values of the corresponding interface card must
be doubled.
** The variability values of the star coupler cards depend on the
combinations of interface cards in the star coupler and are listed in Table
3-3.
Configuring Networks
3-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Other Components (Transceivers, Fan-Out Units, etc.)
Component Delay Equivalent Variability Value
Mini OTDE 100 m 2 BT
Mini UTDE 140 m 2 BT
Transceiver 10 m 3 BT
Repeater 140 m 2 BT
SSV 102 (fan-out unit)
Port <-> Port
Port <-> T ransceiver 10 m
5 m 3 BT
2 BT
SSV 104 (fan-out unit)
Port <-> Port
Port <-> T ransceiver 15 m
8 m 5 BT
4 BT
CP 443-1, CP 343-1,
CP 1514, CP 1613
TP link
AUI link 140 m
0 m 0 BT
0 BT
OSM, ESM
TP port 210 m 3 BT
Configuring Networks
3-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Table 3-3 Variability Values in Bit Times (BT) for Interface Card Pairs
ECFL2 ECFL4 ECTP3 ECAUI KYDE-S UYDE
ECFL2 4 BT 4 BT 5 BT 4 BT 4 BT 7 BT
ECFL4 - 3 BT 5 BT 3 BT 3 BT 6 BT
ECTP3 - - 5 BT 5 BT 5 BT 6 BT
ECAUI - - - 2 BT 2 BT 4 BT
UYDE - - - – – 3 BT
OLM OLM
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Node 1 Node 2
1
1
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
100 m
100 m
2000 m
2. Fiber-Optic Cable (FO)
2
Figure 3-1 Example of a Simple Configuration
Example of a calculation:
The simple example of a point-to-point link between two DTEs via two OLMs
illustrates how to check the network configuration.
Table 3-4 Sample Calculation for Figure 3-1
Node 1 --> Node 2 Cable Length Delay Equivalent Variability Value
Node 1 140 m 0 BT
Node 1 - OLM 1 100 m
OLM 1 (ITP/FO) 360 m 6 BT
OLM 1 - OLM 2 2000 m
OLM 2 (FO/ITP) 360 m 6 BT
OLM 2 - node 2 100 m
Node 2 140 m 0 BT
Sum of cable length 2200 m
Sum of delay equivalents 1000 m
Totals 3200 m 12 BT
The sum of the cable lengths plus the sum of the delay equivalents add up to
3200 m. The PVV is 12 bit times. This means that the configuration can be
implemented.
Configuring Networks
3-11
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.2.2 Bus Structure
The bus structure allows the cascading of OLMs or ELMs in series via fiber-optic
cables or twisted pair. A distance of 0 to 3100 m is possible between two link
modules connected by optical fiber. With TP cables, a distance of up to 100 m is
possible. If a module develops a fault or there is a break on the cable, the network
breaks down into two subnets. Within these subnets, problem-free operation
remains possible. The advantage of this topology is that large distances can be
covered providing the configuration rules are adhered to.
3.2.3 OLM Bus Structure via Optical Fiber
Up to 11 OLMs can be cascaded in series with a remaining cable length of 1180 m
providing no further network components exist (refer to the sample calculation).
OLM OLM
ÇÇÇÇÇ
OLM
ÇÇÇÇÇ
OLM
ÇÇÇÇ
11
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
Node 1
Node 2
2
2. Fiber-Optic Cable (FO)
Figure 3-2 Example of an OLM Bus Structure
Configuring Networks
3-12 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Sample Calculation (cascading limits)
Number of OLMs Path Variability Value of
Node 1 to Node 2 Total PVV
26 BT + 6 BT 12 BT
46 BT + 2 * 3 BT + 6 BT 18 BT
86 BT + 6 * 3 BT + 6 BT 30 BT
11 6 BT + 9 * 3 BT + 6 BT 39 BT
12 6 BT + 10 * 3 BT + 6 BT 42 BT > 40 BT !!
Number of OLMs Delay Equivalent from
Node 1 to Node 2 Remaining Cable Length
2140 m + 2 * 360 m + 140 m 3520 m
4140 m + 360 m + 2 * 260 m + 360 m + 140 m 3000 m
8140 m + 360 m + 6 * 260 m + 360 m + 140 m 1960 m
11 140 m + 360 m + 9 * 260 m + 360 m + 140 m 1180 m
Notes:
SIf a DTE is connected via the integrated TP port, this attachment must be
included in the length calculation as a delay equivalent of 140 m and a PVV of
0.
SEach further network component increases the PVV and reduces the remaining
cable length.
Configuring Networks
3-13
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.2.4 Bus Structure Containing only ELMs
Up to 13 ELMs can be cascaded in series using TP cables providing no further
network components exist (see sample calculation).
Cascading ELMs via the ITP Ports
ELM ELM ELM ELM
11
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
Node 1 Node 2
2. ITP XP standard cable 9/9
222
Figure 3-3 Example of a Bus Structure with ELMs via ITP Ports
Sample Calculation (cascading limits)
Number of ELMs Delay Equivalent from
Node 1 to Node 2 Total PVV
23 BT + 3 BT 6 BT
43 BT + 2 * 3 BT + 3 BT 12 BT
83 BT + 6 * 3 BT + 3 BT 24 BT
11 3 BT + 9 * 3 BT + 3 BT 33 BT
12 3 BT + 10 * 3 BT + 3 BT 36 BT
13 3 BT + 11 * 3 BT + 3 BT 39 BT
14 3 BT + 12 * 3 BT + 3 BT 42 BT > 40 BT !!
Number of ELMs Delay Equivalent from
Node 1 to Node 2 Remaining Cable Length
2140 m + 190 m + 190 m + 140 m 3860 m
4140 m + 190 m + 2 * 190 m + 190 m + 140 m 3480 m
8140 m + 190 m + 6 * 190 m + 190 m + 140 m 2720 m
11 140 m + 190 m + 9 * 190 m + 190 m + 140 m 2150 m
12 140 m + 190 m + 10 * 190 m + 190 m + 140 m 1960 m
13 140 m + 190 m + 11 * 190 m + 190 m + 140 m 1770 m
Configuring Networks
3-14 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Notes:
SEach further network component increases the PVV and reduces the remaining
cable length.
SWhen cascading OLMs and ELMs using twisted-pair cables, make sure that
you use a crossover cable (cable with XP identifier). This is available in lengths
from 2 to 100 meters. For further information and ordering data, refer to the
chapter “Passive Components for Electrical Networks”.
3.2.5 Combining OLMs and ELMs in a Bus Configuration
A combined OLM/ELM bus structure is also possible. This allows a connection
between an optical network and a triaxial network. The cascading depths that are
possible and the remaining cable lengths depend on the modules being used.
Please note that an interconnection on an OLM from optical fiber to TP produces a
higher delay equivalent and a higher variability value.
Example:
ELMOLM
ÇÇÇÇ
ELMOLMOLM OLMOLM
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Node 1
Node 2
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
2. TP cord 9/RJ45
3. ITP XP standard cable 9/9
1
33
2
4. 727-1 drop cable
5. Triaxial cable
6. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
64544
6
Figure 3-4 Example of a Combined OLM/ELM Bus Structure
Configuring Networks
3-15
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Checking the example:
Node 1 --> Node 2 Delay Equivalent Variability Value
Node 1 140 m 0 BT
OLM 1 (ITP/FO) 360 m 6 BT
OLM 2 (FO/FO) 260 m 3 BT
OLM 3 (FO/ITP) 360 m 6 BT
ELM 1 (ITP/AUI) 190 m 3 BT
Transceiver 10 m 3 BT
Transceiver 10 m 3 BT
ELM 2 (AUI/ITP) 190 m 3 BT
OLM 4 (ITP/FO) 360 m 6 BT
OLM 5 (FO/FO) 260 m 3 BT
Mini OTDE 100 m -
Totals 2240 m 36 BT
Remaining values 2280 m 4 BT
The table indicates that the configuration planned in the example is correct and
that a cable length of 2280 m remains for networking the components.
Notes:
SEach further network component increases the PVV and reduces the remaining
cable length.
SWhen cascading OLMs and ELMs using twisted-pair, make sure that you use a
crossover cable (cable with XP identifier). This is available in lengths from 2 to
100 meters. For further information and ordering data, refer to the chapter
“Passive Components for Electrical Networks”.
Configuring Networks
3-16 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.2.6 Redundant Ring Structure with OLMs
This network topology is a special form of the bus topology. The first and last OLM
are connected together via optical fiber and the ring is therefore closed. Port 5 of
an OLM within this ring structure must be switched to the redundant mode. The
line connected to port 5 then becomes a redundant line that is only used for data
transmission when there is a break in the ring. In contrast to a normal bus
structure, a ring provides increased availability of the network since the data
exchange can be maintained even when an OLM drops out or when the cable is
broken and only the sections affected directly by the problem are segmented.
Note
All OLMs in the redundant ring can only be connected to each other by fiber-optic
cables.
Configuring Networks
3-17
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Configuration Rule
A maximum of 11 OLMs can be cascaded in a redundant ring; in other words, a
frame can pass through a maximum of 11 OLMs when being transferred from a
sending to a receiving DTE.
OLM OLM
OLM OLM OLM
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
200 m 400 m 500 m 600 m
1000 m
54
Redundant line
Highest bus
load in network Redundant
mode = ON
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
1
1
Node 1 Node 2
Shortest section
2. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
2
Figure 3-5 Example of a Redundant Ring Structure with OLMs
The total cable length includes all the cable lengths in the ring and the cables to
the DTEs less the shortest section in the ring (in other words, the worst-case
situation if a section breaks down).
Example:
5 OLMs are connected in a redundant ring. 5 OLMs mean that 3020 m remain for
the cable length. Each DTE with an integrated TP port is connected via a 100 m
TP cable. This means that 2540 m remain for the redundant ring. The sum of the
lengths in this example is 200 m + 400 m + 500 m + 600 m + 1000 m = 2700 m,
minus the shortest section of 200 m leaves 2500 m. This means that the redundant
ring structure has been created according to the configuration rules.
Configuring Networks
3-18 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Note on OLM Version 1:
Version 1 OLMs were no longer supplied from the start of 1998 !
To avoid loss of performance in redundant ring structures with OLM version 1 in
the redundant mode, you must take into account the load distribution in the
network. Follow the steps below:
SFind out which OLM transfers the highest volume of data via its twisted pair
ports into the redundant ring.
SConfigure the DTEs connected to this OLM so that they take the initiative in
establishing layer 4 connections (active connection establishment).
SSet up a connection from this OLM to port 5 of an adjacent OLM and switch this
adjacent OLM to the redundant mode.
With OLM version 2.0 in the redundant mode, you do not need to take into account
the load distribution in the network.
If version 1 and version 2.0 OLMs coexist in a redundant ring structure, there will
be less configuration effort involved if you switch the version 2.0 OLM to the
redundant mode.
Notes:
SIf problems occur implementing a redundant optical ring in practice due to the
optical fiber sections being too long, it is possible to get round the problem. To
do this, each module is physically connected to the next but one module. At the
start and end of a bus connected in this way, the two adjacent modules must be
connected to each other (see Figure 3-6).
SAll the modules in a ring must be connected over fiber-optic cables.
OLM OLMOLM
OLM OLM
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Figure 3-6 Alternative Cabling Technique for a Network Structure with a Redundant
Optical Ring Topology
Configuring Networks
3-19
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.2.7 Combinations with Star Couplers and other Network
Components
SOptical interface cards ECFL2, ECFL4
OLMs can be combined with star couplers in an optical network (see Figure
3-7). A bus structure or redundant ring structure can be created with the ECFL2
or ECFL4. The maximum span of the ring depends, in this situation, on the
combinations.
SIndustrial Twisted Pair interface card ECTP3
Using the ECTP3, you can attach OSMs/ESMs, OLMs, and ELMs to a star
coupler via twisted-pair cables (see Figure 3-7). If you want to cascade
modules, use a crossover cable (cable type XP).
SUTP Multiport Repeater interface Card UYDE
You can connect DTEs using TP Cord or network components such as the
OSM, ELM, OLM using TP XP Cord to an ASGE star coupler via the RJ-45
jacks of the UYDE. The UYDE operates according to the 10BASE-T standard
at 10 Mbps.
SMini UTDE electrical transceiver (RJ-45)
The electrical Mini UTDE RJ-45 transceiver can be plugged in to the AUI
interface of DTEs or network components. It converts the AUl port to a
twisted-pair port with RJ-45 connector technology.
SMINI OTDE optical transceiver
The optical transceiver can be plugged into all DTEs that have an AUI port. This allows direct
attachment to optical components such as the OLM.
Note
Optical connection of MINI OTDE (10 Mbps) and OSM (100 Mbps) is not possible.
STransceiver
ELMs can be attached to a triaxial segment via transceivers and a 727-1 drop
cable. Please remember that if the transceiver has two ports and is version 4 or
earlier, the attachment must be at the left port.
Whatever configuration is used, the configuration guidelines explained in the
previous sections must be adhered to.
Configuring Networks
3-20 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Example
The following example once again illustrates how to configure a network when
mixing OSMs, OLMs, ELMs, and star couplers. The individual transmission paths
must be checked.
Critical paths are those in which the signal runs through long sections of cable and
a lot of network components between two nodes.
The connection between node 1 and node 3 represents a critical path. Node 3 is
connected to OLM 4 in the redundant ring. In redundant ring structures, make sure
that the worst-case situation is assumed for the connection during configuration.
This means that a connection that is only used redundantly must also be included
although this represents a detour in the normal mode.
Configuring Networks
3-21
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Ê
OLM
5
ELM
OLM
6
OLM
7
OLM
2
OLM
3
OLM
4
OLMOLM ELM
OLM
1
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ASGE
400 m 250 m
100 m 80 m
50 m
300 m200 m100 m
300 m
100 m
45
Redundant
line
Port 5 in the
redundant mode
Node 1
Node 3
2
3
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
2. TP cord 9/RJ45
3. ITP XP standard cable 9/9
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
Node 4
6
44
5
6
6
4. 727-1 drop cable
5. Triaxial cable
6. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
Node 2
Node 5
OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62
Figure 3-7 Combination of OLMs and Star Couplers
If redundant OLM rings are connected to a star coupler as shown in the example,
this ring must be segmented to a worst-case bus. In the example configuration,
this means that the line between the star coupler and OLM 4 is interrupted (the
lightning strike shown in Figure 3-7). If node 3 on OLM 4 wants to exchange data
with node 1 on OLM 1, the route from OLM 4 via OLM 5, 6 and 7 to the star
coupler must be calculated.
Configuring Networks
3-22 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Note
If redundant rings are attached to a star coupler structure, when checking the
configuration, the redundant ring must be segmented to produce a worst-case bus
structure. To do this, the shortest connection from the star coupler to one of the
two adjacent OLMs is interrupted.
Table 3-5 Checking the Example
Node 1
--> Node 3 Cable Length
(as Example) Delay Equivalent Variability Value
Node 1 140 m 0 BT
Node 1 - OLM 1 100 m
OLM 1 (ITP/FO) 360 m 6 BT
OLM 1 - OLM 2 400 m
OLM 2 (FO/FO) 260 m 3 BT
OLM 2 - OLM 3 250 m
OLM 3 (FO/ITP) 360 m 6 BT
OLM 3 - ECTP 3 80 m
ASGE (ECTP3/ECFL2) 225 m 5 BT
ECFL 2 - OLM 7 100 m
OLM 7 (FO/FO) 260 m 3 BT
OLM 7 - OLM 6 200 m
OLM 6 (FO/FO) 260 m 3 BT
OLM 6 - OLM 5 300 m
OLM 5 (FO/FO) 260 m 3 BT
OLM 5 - OLM 4 300 m
OLM 4 (FO/ITP) 360 m 6 BT
OLM 4 - Node 3 100 m
Node 3 140 m 0 BT
Sum of cable length 1830 m
Sum of the delay equivalents 2625 m
Totals 4455 m 35 BT
The path between node 1 and node 3 is correctly configured; in other words, all the nodes
attached to the redundant ring can exchange data via the star coupler and the line
segment connected to ECTP 3.
Configuring Networks
3-23
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
The same checks must also be performed for other paths (for example node 1 <->
node 4, node 3 <-> node 4). The configuration is only correct when the limit values
are not exceeded by any of the paths.
Note
The path of nodes 1, 3, 4 and 5 to node 2 only needs to be checked as far as the
first OSM. Due to the way in which the OSM works (“store-and-forward
switching”), every collision domain ends at the port of an OSM.
3.3 Switched LANs
Switched Connection Paths
The main feature of switched LANs is that the connection paths for each data
packet are switched based on the data destination address. At any point in time,
several different data packets can be in transit through the network on different
connection paths. The data packets are transported only through segments that
lead to the receiver. The products that operate according to the switching method
and are therefore used to form switched LANs include the OSM and ESM.
End of the Collision Domain
A further feature of OSMs/ESMs compared with the shared LAN products (OLM
and ELM) is that the collision domain ends at the port of an OSM/ESM. In terms of
configuration, this means that delay equivalents and path variability values do not
need to be checked on connections between OSMs/ESMs.
When structuring the network, you only need to make sure that the permitted
maximum lengths of TP and FO cables are not exceeded.
Up to 50 OSMs/ESMs can be cascaded in a ring or bus structure.
Configuring Networks
3-24 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.4 Configuring an Electrical 100 Mbps Switched LAN
Products
The following components and cables are used in a 100 Mbps switched LAN:
SComponents
–Electrical switch module ESM
SCables
–Twisted pair cable
–TP cord
3.4.1 Twisted-Pair Links
100BASE-TX
The twisted-pair ports of the ESM comply with the IEEE 802.3u: 100BASE-TX
standard. The connectors are either sub-D-9 or RJ-45 jacks depending on the
ESM variant.
Requirements of Twisted Pair Cables
The twisted-pair cables between two adjacent ESMs must not exceed the following
maximum lengths:
Table 3-6 Max. Cable Lengths with Twisted-Pair Cables
Cable Structure Cable Type Max.
length Max. Total of the Patch
Cables (TP Cord)
In one piece ITP standard 2x2
(with sub-D
connectors)
100 m –
Structured FC standard cable
FC trailing cable
FC marine cable
(connected to RJ-45
FC outlet)
90 m
75 m
75 m
10 m
10 m
10 m
Configuring Networks
3-25
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.4.2 ESM Bus Structure
100 Mbps Switched LAN with a Bus Structure
The Industrial Ethernet ESMs allow the implementation of 100 Mbps switched
LANs with a bus structure. The maximum distance between two ESMs must not
exceed 100 m. You can cascade the modules to form a bus using any TP port. Up
to a maximum of 50 ESMs can be cascaded.
2
ESM ESM ITP 80ESM ESM ITP 80 ESM
22
34 44
S7-400 S7-400
S7-300
PC
2 ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9
3 TP Cord 9/RJ45
4 ITP Standard Cable 9/15
2
Figure 3-8 Bus with ESMs
3.4.3 Redundant Ring Structure with ESMs
Redundant Electrical Ring
With the aid of an ESM functioning as the redundancy manager (RM), both ends of
an electrical bus made up of ESMs can be closed to form a redundant electrical
ring. The ESMs are connected together using ports 7 and 8. The RM monitors the
ESM bus connected to it, closes the bus if it detects an interruption and therefore
reestablishes a functioning bus configuration.
A maximum of 50 ESMs are permitted in an electrical ring. This allows a
reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s to be achieved. The RM mode is activated
on the ESM using a DIP switch.
The maximum length of the twisted-pair cable between two ESMs is 100 m. This
means that an electrical ring including 50 ESMs can have a maximum span of 5
km.
Configuring Networks
3-26 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Note
The reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can only be achieved when no
components (for example switches from other vendors) other than ESMs are used
in the redundant ring.
In a ring, one device and one device only must operate in the redundancy
manager mode.
DTEs or complete network segments can be attached to ports 1 – 6 of an ESM
operating in the RM mode.
222
2 Structured cabling with SIMATIC NET twisted pair
222
ESM in
RM mode
2
2
2
ESM TP80 ESM TP80 ESM TP80 ESM TP80
ESM TP80
ESM TP80 ESM TP80 ESM TP80 ESM TP80
Figure 3-9 Redundant Ring Structure with ESMs
Configuring Networks
3-27
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.5 Configuring an Optical 100 Mbps Switched LAN
Products
The following components and cables are used an optical 100 Mbps switched LAN:
SComponents
–OSM (I)TPnn (with multimode glass fiber-optic cable)
–OSM (I)TPnn-LD (with single mode glass fiber-optic cable)
SCables
–Multimode glass fiber-optic cable type 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm
–Single mode glass fiber-optic cable type 10/125 µm
–Twisted-pair cable, TP Cord
3.5.1 Fiber-Optic Links
The optical ports of the OSMs comply with the IEEE 802.3u standard:
100BASE-FX. They operate at a wavelength of 1300 nm.
Multimode glass fibers of the type 50/125 µm and 62.5/125 µm are suitable for the
connection.
To interconnect OSM (I)TPnn-LD (Long Distance Modules), single mode glass
fibers of the type 10/125 µm are the most suitable.
The possible length of the fiber-optic link is decided by the following:
SThe fiber type multimode / single mode
SThe power loss of the fiber at 1300 nm
SThe bandwidth distance product of the fiber
Requirements of Multimode Glass Fiber-Optic Cables
Multimode glass fiber-optic cables between two OSM (I)TPnn modules must meet
the following requirements in terms of power loss and the bandwidth distance
product:
Table 3-7 Max. length of a link with multimode FOCs between two OSM (I)TPnn modules
Fiber Type FO Power Loss
at 1300 nm Bandwidth Distance
Product Max. length
50/125 µm<=2.6 dB/km >= 500 MHz * km 3,000 m
62.5/125 µm<=1.6 dB/km >= 500 MHz * km 3,000 m
Configuring Networks
3-28 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Requirements of Single Mode Fiber-Optic Cables
Single mode glass fiber-optic cables between two OSM (I)TPnn modules must
meet the following requirements in terms of power loss and the bandwidth distance
product:
Table 3-8 Maximum length of a link with single mode FOCs between two OSM (I)TPnn-LD modules
Fiber Type FO Power Loss
at 1300 nm Bandwidth Distance
Product Max. length
10/125 µm<=2.6 dB/km >= 500 MHz * km 26,000 m
SIMATIC NET Multimode Glass Fiber-Optic Cables
The SIMATIC NET product range for Industrial Ethernet includes various types of
multimode glass fiber-optic cables with 62.5/125 µm fibers (see “Passive
Components for Optical Networks”).
SINDOOR fiber-optic cable
SFiber-optic standard cable
SFlexible fiber-optic trailing cable
SSIENOPYR duplex marine fiber-optic cable
When connecting SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OSMs using
SIMATIC NET multimode glass fiber-optic cables, distances of 0 to 3000 m are
permitted between two adjacent components.
Note
Single mode glass fiber-optic cables with fiber type 10/125 µm are available in
customized lengths. You will find the person to contact in the ”Support and
Training” section of this manual.
Configuring Networks
3-29
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.5.2 OSM Bus Structure
The Industrial Ethernet OSMs allow the implementation of 100 Mbps switched
LANs with a bus structure. The maximum distance between 2 OSMs is 3000 m or
26 km for the LD variant. Modules are cascaded using the FO ports. Up to 50
OSMs can be cascaded.
Ê
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
2. TP cord 9/RJ-45
11
2
2
3. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
3
OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62
Figure 3-10 OSM Bus Structure
Configuring Networks
3-30 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.5.3 Redundant Ring Structure with OSMs
Redundant Optical Ring
With the aid of an OSM functioning as the redundancy manager (RM), both ends
of an optical bus made up of OSMs can be closed to form a redundant optical ring.
The OSMs are connected together using ports 7 and 8. The RM monitors the OSM
bus connected to it, closes the bus if it detects an interruption and therefore
reestablishes a functioning bus configuration.
A maximum of 50 OSMs are permitted in an optical ring. This allows a
reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s to be achieved. The RM mode is activated
on the OSM using a DIP switch.
The maximum length of the fiber-optic cable between two OSMs is 3,000 m. This
means that an optical ring including 50 OSMs can have a maximum span of 150
km.
Note
The reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can only be achieved when no
components (for example switches from other vendors) other than OSMs are used
in the redundant ring.
In a ring, one device and one device only must operate in the redundancy
manager mode.
DTEs or complete network segments can be attached to ports 1 – 6 of an OSM
operating in the RM mode.
111
1 Fiber-optic cable 111
OSM in
RM mode
1
1
1
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Figure 3-11 Redundant Ring Structure with OSMs
Configuring Networks
3-31
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
3.6 Redundant Linking of Network Segments with OSMs/ESMs
Standby-Sync Port
The standby-sync port allows the connection of two Industrial Ethernet OSMs or
ESMs with one operating as standby master (DIP switch ”Stby off”) and the other
as standby slave (DIP switch ”Stby on”). With this mode, pairs of OSMs/ESMs can
be used for redundant coupling of OSM/ESM or OLM rings.
With network management, the OSM/ESM can also be configured so that several
rings or networks can be interconnected at the same time with two OSMs/ESMs
(see OSM/ESM Network Management, Manual /8/).
Synchronization Cable
The redundant connection between two network segments is on two separate
paths. The standby-sync ports of the two OSMs/ESMs used for the redundant link
are interconnected by a synchronization cable. The cable used for this is a TP-XP
Standard Cable 9/9 with a maximum length of 40 m. The two OSMs/ESMs inform
each other of their operating states via this synchronization cable. One of these
OSMs/ESMs is assigned the redundant function using the DIP switch setting ”Stby
on” (standby slave). The other OSM takes over the function of the standby master
(DIP switch setting ”Stby off”).
Immediately following the failure of the main transmission path, the standby slave
enables the redundant path. If the main path is OK again, the standby master
informs the standby slave. The main path is enabled and the redundant path
disabled again. The reconfiguration time of the redundant ring coupling is less than
0.3 s.
Port Assignment in the Standby Mode
On the standby master and standby slave, only port 1 (standby port) can be used
for the coupling to the neighboring ring. Ports 2 – 6 can be used just as normal
OSM ports.
The port assignment is the default setting of an OSM when shipped.
With network management, it is also possible to configure ports other than port 1
or several ports as standby ports (see also OSM/ESM Network Management
Manual /8/).
Simultaneous Standby and Redundancy Manager Operation
A standby master or standby slave can act as redundancy manager in a redundant
ring at the same time.
Configuring Networks
3-32 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1
1
1
1 Fiber-optic cable
2 ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9
1
1
OSM in
RM mode
1
1
OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62
OLM OLM
OLM OLM OLM
OLM OLM OLM
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
SM ITP80
ESM ITP80 ESM ITP80
2
2
ESM ITP80 ESM ITP80
2
2
2
2
2
ESM i n
RM mode
Standby
slave
Standby
slave
Standby
master
Standby
master
Ring 3 (OLM ring)
Ring 1 (OSM ring)
Ring 2 (ESM ring)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62
Figure 3-12 Redundant Coupling of Network Segments
4-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Passive Components for Electrical
Networks
Chapter Overview
4.1 Overview of Twisted-Pair Cables 4-2..................................
4.2 Industrial Twisted Pair Standard Cable 4-4.............................
4.3 FastConnect (FC) Twisted-Pair Cables 4-9.............................
4.4 Twisted-Pair Cord 4-15...............................................
4.5 Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) and
Twisted-Pair (TP) Cables 4-19.........................................
4.5.1 Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair Cables 4-20........................
4.5.2 Preassembled Twisted-Pair Cords 4-24.................................
4.5.3 Twisted-Pair Port Converter 4-32......................................
4.6 Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D Connectors 4-34...........................
4.7 RJ-45 Connector 4-37................................................
4.8 Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 4-38................................
4
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.1 Overview of Twisted-Pair Cables
This chapter describes the technical properties of Industrial Twisted Pair and
twisted-pair cables. First, the unassembled cable types are described followed by
the available preassembled cables.
ITP (Sub-D Connectors)
To establish a direct link between nodes and network components, the ITP
Standard Cable preassambled with robust sub-D male connectors is available.
This allows a cable length of up to 100 m without patch cables.
FC Twisted-Pair
For structured cabling within a factory, the FC twisted-pair cabling system is ideal.
Using the FastConnect (FC) system for Industrial Ethernet, structured cabling from
the office environment has been further developed for use in the factory.
Connectors can be fitted to the FastConnect cables quickly on site. As a result, the
RJ-45 cabling technology as an existing standard is now also available for an
industrial environment allowing structured cabling (patch cables, patch panel,
installation cables, outlets, outlet cables).
Guidelines for Laying Cables
You will find information about laying SIMATIC NET twisted-pair cables in Section
7.7 in this manual.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Structured Cabling
Structured cabling complying with EN 50173 describes the tree-structured cabling
of building complexes for information technology purposes regardless of the
applications used. A building is divided into the following areas:
SPrimary area
(interconnection of buildings of a campus)
SSecondary area
(interconnection between floors of a building)
STertiary area (information technology connectors for the DTEs of a floor)
The structured cabling that can be implemented with the Industrial Ethernet
FastConnect system complies with the tertiary cabling described in EN 50173.
ESM TP80
Tertiary cable
FC Outlet RJ-45
FC Outlet RJ-45
DTE
Active
signal distributor
Cable tap
Drop cable
AC
B
Figure 4-1 System Configuration with FC Outlet RJ-45
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Maximum Cable Lengths
Table 4-1 Structured Cabling Complying with EN 50173
Uses SIMATIC NET Cable Maximum Length
Drop cable TP cord A+C max. 10 m
Tertiary cable FC TP Standard Cable
FC TP Trailing Cable
FC TP Marine Cable
Bmax.90m
Bmax.75m
Bmax.75m
Note
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (TP Standard Cable) are intended for use inside
buildings.
Twisted-pair cables (TP Cord) are intended for use in areas where EMI levels are
low such as in an office or a wiring closet.
4.2 Industrial Twisted Pair Standard Cable
Structure of the Standard Cable
The standard cable is designed as a 100 ΩS/STP cable (screened/shielded
twisted pair) with two pairs of wires. The basic element consists of two twisted
wires along with two blind elements, known as a twisted pair.
The wires are solid copper covered by an insulation layer of cellular polyethylene
which is further covered by a non-cellular foam skin. The color coding of the
conductors can be seen in Table 4-2. The cables have an outer sheath of green
PVC.
Table 4-2 Color Coding of the Pairs
Pair 1 2
Conductor a white white
Conductor b blue orange
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Shielding
Each pair of wires is shielded by two plastic laminated aluminum foils with an
external contact surface. All the pairs making up the cable are surrounded by a
braided shield of tin-plated copper wires (coverage approximately 90%).
SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET ITP 6XV1 850-0AH10
I 0086m
Meter marker
(consecutive number)
Surrounding braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Pair shield
(plastic laminated
aluminum foil)
Plastic foil
Blind elements
(pair 2)
Blind elements
(pair 1)
Pair 1 (white/blue)
Pair 2 (white/orange)
Pair shield
(plastic laminated
aluminum foil)
Blind element
Pair 1 (white/blue)
Pair 2 (white/orange)
Plastic foil
Surrounding braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Outer sheath
(green)
Outer sheath
(green)
Figure 4-2 Structure of the Two-Pair Industrial Twisted Pair Standard Cable
Labeling
The standard cable is labeled as follows:
”SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET ITP”.
If the cable is supplied without connectors, the label above is followed by the order
number “6XV1850-0AH10”.
There are also markers at one meter intervals. These make it simple to check the
length of the cable.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Technical Specifications
Table 4-3 Electrical Data of the ITP Standard Cable at 20 °C
Cable categories
complying with EN
50173
CAT5
DC loop resistance maximum 124 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance minimum 5GΩxkm
Attenuation/100 m at 4 MHz
10 MHz
100 MHz
maximum 3.6 dB
5.7 dB
18.0 dB
Near end crosstalk loss
(NEXT)/100 m
at 1 to 300 MHz minimum 80 dB
Characteristic
impedance
at 1 to 100 MHz
100 to 300 MHz
100 Ω±15%
100 Ω+45/-30%
Transfer impedance at 10 MHz maximum 2mΩ/m
Structural return loss at 1 to100 MHz
100 to 300 MHz
minimum 23 dB
15 dB
Longitudinal conversion
loss
minimum 43 dB
Capacitance unbalance
pair to ground
maximum 3400 pF/km
Dielectric strength at 50
Hz
-- conductor/conductor
-- conductor/shield
1min
1min
effective value
700 V
700 V
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Table 4-4 Mechanical Data of the ITP Standard Cable
Standard code J-02YSCY 2x2x0,64/1,5 PIMF F GN
∅Conductor 0.64 mm
∅Outer (approx.) (9.2x6 ±0.5) mm
Approximate thickness of the outer sheath 0.8 mm
Bend radius:
Multiple bends
Single bend
Over the flat side
≥45 mm
≥30 mm
Tensile strength ≤80 N
Pressure load Maximum permitted load: 5 kN/10 cm
Test complying with IEC 794-1 E3
Temperature range:
Operation
Installation/assembly
Transport/storage
-40 °C...70 °C
-5°C...50 °C
-40 °C...70 °C
Copper weight 46 kg/km
Net weight 90 kg/km
Free of halogens no
Resistance to fire Flame-retardant complying with DIN VDE 0472,
Part 804 test type B and IEC 60332-1
Resistance to oil Resistant to mineral oils and fats complying with
VDE 0472 Part 803
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Notes on Installation
The maximum total length of a segment is 100 m. To obtain the best transmission
characteristics, the segment should consist of one single section of cable. In
special situations (for example when passing through two closets), the segment
can consist of up to three separate sections of cable.
The excellent transmission characteristics of the entire system can be guaranteed
only when SIEMENS Industrial Ethernet network components are used exclusively.
Assembling Cables with Twisted-Pair Sub-D Connectors
When assembling Industrial Twisted Pair cables yourself, make sure that you only
combine the Industrial Twisted Pair standard cable 2x2 with the SIMATIC NET
Industrial Twisted Pair sub-D connector for assembly on site. The dimensions of
these two components match each other.
Do Not Connect to FC Outlet RJ-45
The Industrial Twisted Pair standard cable 2x2 is not suitable for connection to the
FC Outlet RJ-45 due to its diameter. Use FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables for
connection to the FC Outlet RJ-45.
Versions Available
The two-pair standard cable is available as a preassembled cable with 9-pin or
15-pin sub-D connectors or can be ordered without connectors in meters.
The following preassembled cables use Industrial Twisted Pair standard cable:
SITP standard cable 9/15
SITP XP standard cable 9/9
SITP XP standard cable 15/15
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.3 FastConnect (FC) Twisted-Pair Cables
General
When installing Industrial Ethernet networks, there are various cable types
available for different applications.
The Industrial Ethernet FC cables listed should be used.
The symmetrical radial structure of the FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables
allows the use of the IE FC stripping tool. With this tool, connecting to the FC
Outlet RJ-45 is fast and simple.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Design
The FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cable is a shielded cable with a symmetrical
radial design and 100 Ωcharacteristic impedance. The cable consists of 4
conductors arranged as a star quad.
The FC TP Standard Cable has solid cores, the FC TP Trailing Cable and the FC
TP Marine Cable have stranded cores.
Surrounding braided mesh shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Plastic laminated
Aluminum foil
Inner sheath
Dummy cores
Cores
(star quad)
Outer sheath
Dummy core
Wire
Plastic foil
Aluminum foil
Inner sheath
Surrounding braided shield
Outer sheath
SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET FC TP
Plastic foil
Figure 4-3 Cross Section of the FastConnect (FC) Twisted-Pair Cable
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-11
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Technical Specifications
Table 4-5 Electrical Specifications of the FastConnect (FC) Twisted-Pair Cables
Cable Type 1) Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Standard
Cable
Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Trailing Cable
Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Marine Cable
Areas of application Universal application Use in drag chains Marine and
offshore applications 2)
Electrical Data at 20 °
°°
°C
Attenuation
at 10 MHz
at 100 MHz
≤6.5 dB/100 m
≤22.0 dB/100 m
≤7.8 dB/100 m
≤26.4 dB/100 m
≤7.8 dB/100 m
≤26.4 dB/100 m
Characteristic impedance
at 1-100 MHz 100 Ω±15% Ω100 Ω±15% Ω100 Ω±15% Ω
Near end crosstalk loss
at 1-100 MHz ≥35 dB/100 m ≥35 dB/100 m ≥35 dB/100 m
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz ≤10 mΩ/m ≤10 mΩ/m ≤10 mΩ/m
DC loop resistance ≤124 Ω/km ≤120 Ω/km ≤120 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance > 500 MΩxkm > 500 MΩxkm > 500 MΩxkm
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C, tested according to DIN 0472
2) Ship building approvals:
-- Germanischer Lloyd
-- Lloyds Register of Shipping
-- Bureau Veritas
-- Det Norske Veritas
-- ABS Europe LTD
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-12 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Table 4-6 Mechanical Specifications of the FastConnect (FC) Twisted-Pair Cables
Cable Type Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Standard
Cable
Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Trailing Cable
Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Marine Cable
Cable type
(standard code) 2YY (ST) CY
2x2x0.64/1.5-100 GN
2YH (ST) C11Y
2x2x0.75/1.5-100 LI
VZNGNFRNC
L-9YH (ST) CH
2x2x0,34/1.5-100
GN VZN FRNC
Inner core ∅(copper) 0.64 mm 0.75 mm 0.75 mm
Insulation PE ∅1.5 mm PE ∅1.5 mm PP ∅1.5 mm
Inner sheath PVC ∅3.9 mm FRNC ∅3.9 mm FRNC ∅3.9 mm
Outer sheath PVC
∅(6.5 ±0.4) mm
PVC
∅(6.5 ±0.2) mm
FRNC
∅(6.5 ±0.4) mm
Environmental conditions
-- Operating temperature
-- Transport/storage
temperature
-- Installation temperature
-- 4 0 °Cto+70°C
-- 4 0 °Cto+70°C
-- 2 0 °Cto+60°C
-- 4 0 °Cto+70°C
-- 5 0 °Cto+70°C
-- 2 0 °Cto+60°C
-- 2 5 °Cto+70°C
-- 4 0 °Cto+70°C
0°Cto+50°C
Permitted bend radius
multiple
single
8x∅
5x∅
8x∅
5x∅
8x∅
5x∅
Bending cycles -- 5 million 3) --
Permitted tensile stress ≤150 N ≤150 N ≤150 N
Weight approx. 70 kg/km 63 kg/km 68 kg/km
Free of halogens no yes yes
Behavior in fire Flame retardant to
IEC 332-1
Flame retardant to
IEC 332-1
Flame retardant to
IEC 332-3 Cat.A/F
Resistance to oil Cond. oil resistant Cond. oil resistant Cond. oil resistant
UL listed yes yes yes
UV resistance yes yes yes
3) at a bent diameter of 200 mm
Application
SFC TP Standard Cable:
Standard bus cable specially designed for fast assembly.
SFC TP Trailing Cable:
Bus cable for special applications with forced movement in a drag chain; for
example with permanently moving machine parts (stranded cores,
halogen-free).
SFC TP Marine Cable:
Bus cable specially for use on ships (stranded cores, halogen-free, certified for
ship building).
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-13
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Advantages
SFor structured cabling in the factory
STime-saving due to simple and fast installation with FastConnect cables and the
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
SSpecific versions for different applications
-- FC TP Standard Cable
-- FC TP Trailing Cable
-- FC TP Marine Cable
SHigh noise immunity due to double shielding
SEasy length measurement with printed meter markers
SExceeds the requirements of category 5 of the international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173
Notes on Installation
The bus cables are sold in meters.
FastConnect
Using the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect stripping tool, the outer jacket and shield
of Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables can be stripped to correct lengths in a
single action. This allows the Outlet RJ-45 to be connected quickly and simply to
the Industrial Ethernet FC cable.
Note the reduced maximum length for FC TP Trailing and FC TP Marine
Cable
Due to the stranded cores used in the two special cables FC TP Trailing Cable and
FC TP Marine Cable, the signal attenuation is higher. To avoid exceeding the
maximum permitted attenuation of a transmission link, the maximum distance
between two FC Outlet RJ-45 taps for FC TP Trailing Cable or FC TP Marine
Cableis75m.
Do not use with twisted-pair sub-D connectors
FastConnect twisted-pair cables are not suitable for the use of Industrial Twisted
Pair sub-D connectors due to their diameter. If you assemble Industrial Twisted
Pair cables yourself with sub-D connectors, use only Industrial Twisted Pair
standard cable!
Laying Cables
During storage, transport, and installation, the bus cable must be closed at both
ends with a shrink-on cover. Make sure that you do not exceed the bend radii and
tensile stress!
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-14 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Ordering Data
Table 4-7
Order number
Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Standard Cable
TP installation cable for attachment to Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
for universal application, 4-wire, shielded, sold in meters, maximum length
available 1000 m, minimum length 20 m.
6XV1 840-2AH10
Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Trailing Cable
TP installation cable for attachment to the Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet
RJ-45 for use in a drag chain, 4-wire, shielded, maximum length available
1000m, minimum length 20m.
6XV1 840-3AH10
Industrial Ethernet
FC TP Marine Cable
TP installation cable for attachment to Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45,
approved for ship building, 4-wire, shielded, maximum length available
1000m, minimum length 20m.
6XV1 840-4AH10
Industrial Ethernet FC Stripping Tool
Preset insulation stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet FC
cables
6GK1 901-1GA00
Industrial Ethernet FC Blade Cassettes
Cassette with spare blades for the Industrial Ethernet Stripping Tool, set of 5
6GK1 901-1GB00
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 6GK1 901-1FC00-0AA0
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-15
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.4 Twisted-Pair Cord
General
The TP Cord is used to attach DTEs to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling system.
It is intended for use in an environment with low levels of noise, such as in an
office or within wiring closets.
To distinguish between crossover and straight through cables, the RJ-45
connectors are color-coded. On crossover cables, the RJ-45 connectors are red at
both ends, on straight through cables, the RJ-45 connectors are green at both
ends.
A maximum of 10 m of twisted-pair cord can be used between two devices. With
structured cabling using two TP Cord cables, the two patch cables together must
not exceed this length.
Adapter cables are used to connect devices with a sub-D port to devices with an
RJ-45 port.
The TP port converter is used to connect a DTE with an RJ-45 interface to the
Industrial Twisted Pair cabling system.
Design
The cable consists of two pairs of wires each pair twisted together (PIMPF
structure). Each pair is shielded with an aluminum foil. The outer shield is a
tin-plated copper braid mesh. The outer sheath is PVC.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-16 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Shielding
Each pair of wires is shielded by two plastic laminated aluminum foils with an
external contact surface. All the pairs making up the cable are surrounded by a
braided shield of tin-plated copper wires (coverage approximately 88%).
SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET TP CORD CAT5 (600MHz)
Surrounding braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Pair shield
(plastic laminated
aluminum foil)
Plastic foil
Pair 1 (white/blue)
Pair 2 (white/orange)
Pair shield
(plastic laminated
aluminum foil)
Pair 1 (white/blue)
Pair 2 (white/orange)
Plastic foil
Surrounding braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Outer sheath
(green)
Outer sheath
(green)
Figure 4-4 Structure of the two-pair TP Cord (PIMF)
Labeling
The TP Cord is labeled as follows:
”SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET TP CORD CAT5 (600MHz)”.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-17
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Technical Specifications
Table 4-8 Electrical Data of the Twisted-Pair Cord at 20oC
Cable category
(EN 50173)
CAT5
DC loop resistance maximum 300 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance minimum 150 MΩxkm
Attenuation/100 m at 4 MHz
10 MHz
100 MHz
maximum 5.7 dB
9.0 dB
28.5 dB
Near end crosstalk
loss
(NEXT)/100 m
at 4 MHz
10 MHz
100 MHz
minimum 80.0 dB
80.0 dB
72.5 dB
Char. impedance at 1 to 100 MHz 100 Ω±15%
Transfer impedance at 10 MHz maximum 10 mΩ/m
Structural return loss at 1 to 20 MHz
20 to 100 MHz
minimum 23 dB
23 dB -- 10log(f/20)
Longitudinal conversion
loss
minimum 43 dB
Capacitance unbalance
pair to ground
at 1 kHz maximum 1600 pF/km
Dielec. strength at 50 Hz
--conductor/conductor
-- conductor/shield
1min
1min
effective value
700 V
700 V
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-18 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Table 4-9 Mechanical Data of the Twisted-Pair Cord
Standard code LI02YSCY 2x2x0,15/0.98 PIMF GN
∅Copper wire 0.5 mm
Outer dimensions approx. 3.7 x 5.8 mm
Thickness of the outer sheath approx. 0.5 mm
Bend radius:
single bend
multiple bends
≥20 mm over the narrow side
≥30 mm over the narrow side
Tensile strength: ≤48 N
Temperature range:
Operation
Installation/assembly
Transport/storage
-40 oC...70 oC
-20 oC...50 oC
-40 oC...70 oC
Net weight 33 kg/km
Free of halogens no
Resistance to fire Flame-retardant to DIN VDE 0472, Part 804 test type B
Versions Available
The following preassembled cables use TP cord:
STP Cord RJ-45 / RJ-45 with 2 RJ-45 connectors
STP XP Cord RJ-45 / RJ-45 with 2 RJ-45 connectors (crossover)
STP cord 9/RJ-45 with one 9-pin sub-D and one RJ-45 connector
STP cord 9 / RJ-45 with one 9-pin sub-D and one
RJ-45 connector (crossover)
STP Cord 9 -45 / RJ-45 with one 9-pin sub-D male connector (45ocable outlet)
and one RJ-45 connector
STP XP Cord 9-45/ RJ-45 with one 9-pin sub-D male connector (45ocable outlet)
and one RJ-45 connector (crossover)
STP cord 9 / RJ-45 with one 9-pin sub-D and one (crossover)
STP Cord RJ-45/15 with one 15-pin sub-D and one RJ-45 connector
STP XP Cord RJ-45/15 with one 15-pin sub-D and one RJ-45 connector
(crossover)
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-19
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.5 Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) and
Twisted-Pair (TP) Cables
Use of Preassembled Cables
Preassembled SIMATIC NET cables are available to connect DTEs and network
components.
Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) Cables
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables are intended for direct links (without
patch cables) of up to 100 m in length between two devices.
Due to the double, extra thick shielding, Industrial Twisted Pair cables are
particularly suitable for an industrial environment with high levels of EMI, for
example for a connection between wiring closets.
Twisted-Pair (TP) Cables (Cord)
The flexibility of the cord cables allows simple installation, for example in a wiring
closet or to connect devices in a control room with low EMI levels.
A maximum of 10 m of twisted-pair cord can be used between two devices. With
structured cabling using two twisted-pair patch cables, this length is maximum for
both patch cables together.
Adapter cables are used to connect devices with a sub-D port to devices with
RJ-45 port.
To convert the RJ-45 interface of a DTE to a 15-pin sub-D interface of the ITP
cabling system, you can use the TP converter cord 15/RJ-45.
Note
Other special cables and special lengths are available on request. You will find a
contact address in Appendix B.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-20 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.5.1 Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair Cables
General
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables use the sturdy 9 or 15-pin sub-D
connectors on an ITP standard cable. These cables have the additional “ITP”
marking. These cables require DTEs and network components with Industrial
Twisted Pair ports.
The connection between an active network component and the DTE is established
with an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with a 9-pin (network component end) and a
15-pin sub-D connector at the DTE end.
To connect two active network components, an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with
two 9-pin sub-D connectors is used. The two wire pairs are crossed over. Crossed
wires have the additional “XP” marking (crossed pairs).
To connect two DTEs to each other, an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with two
15-pin sub-D connectors is used. The wire pairs are again crossed over and this
cable also has the additional “XP” marking.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-21
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Product Range
The following preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables are available:
Table 4-10 Industrial Twisted Pair Cable Products
Cable
Name
Use Suppliable
Lengths
Order number
ITP standard cable 9/15 ITP installation cable is used
for direct attachment of DTEs
with an ITP port to Industrial
Ethernet network
components with an ITP port;
with one 9-pin and one 15-pin
sub-D connector
2m,5m,8m,
12 m, 15 m,
20 m, 30 m,
40 m, 50 m,
60 m, 70 m,
80 m, 90 m,
100 m
6XV1850-0Bxxx 1)
ITP XP standard cable 9/9 Crossover ITP installation
cable for direct connection of
two Industrial Ethernet
network components with an
ITP port;
with two 9-pin sub-D
connectors
2m,5m,8m,
12 m, 15 m,
20 m, 30 m,
40 m, 50 m,
60 m, 70 m,
80 m, 90 m,
100 m
6XV1850-0Cxxx 1)
ITP XP standard cable 15/15 Crossover ITP installation
cable for direct connection to
DTEs with an ITP port;
with two 15-pin sub-D
connectors
2m,6m,10m 6XV1850-0Dxxx 1)
1) For a complete list of the order numbers, refer to the catalog IK PI
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-22 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
S7-400
S7-300
S7-400
S7-300
S7-400
S7-300
NC
NC NC
Network component
Network component Network component
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cable
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cable
Connector
Sub-D-9
Connector
Sub-D-15
ITP Standard
Cable 9/15
Connector
Sub-D-9
Connector
Sub-D-9
ITP XP Standard
Cable 9/9
Connector
Sub-D-15
Connector
Sub-D-15
ITP XP Standard
Cable 15/15
Preassembled crossover
Industrial Twisted Pair cable
Figure 4-5 Use of Preassembled Industrial Twisted-Pair Cables for Direct Links Between Components
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-23
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Pinning
converting
AUI/ITP port
1
6
5
9
3
10
5
12
6
7
RD+
RD--
TD+
TD--
TD+
TD--
RD+
RD--
Function
Network component
Casing, Shield Pin Function
DTE
9-pin sub-D connector
Coding jumper for
15-pin sub-D connector
Pin
blue
white
orange
white
a) Pinning of the ITP standard cable 9/15
b) Pinning of the ITP XP standard cable 9/9
1
6
5
9
1
6
5
9
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD--
TD+
TD--
Function Casing, Shield
Pin
Function
9-pin sub-D connector
9-pin sub-D connector
Pin
blue
white
orange
white
Network component Network component
converting
AUI/ITP port
3
10
5
12
3
10
5
12
6
7
TD+
TD--
RD+
RD--
TD+
TD--
RD+
RD--
Function
(DTE)
Casing, Shield
Pin
Function
(DTE)
Coding jumper for
Pin
blue
white
orange
white
converting AUI/ITP
port
Coding jumper for 6
7
c) Pinning of the ITP XP standard cable 15/15
15-pin sub-D connector15-pin sub-D connector
DTE DTE
Figure 4-6 Pinning of the Industrial Twisted Pair Standard Cables
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-24 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.5.2 Preassembled Twisted-Pair Cords
General
In environments in which low noise levels can be expected and for lines up to
10 m, twisted-pair cables can be used. These use the TP cord that is much thinner
and more flexible than the Industrial Twisted Pair cables due to the reduced
shielding. Both the standard RJ-45 connectors and sub-D connectors are used to
connect Industrial Twisted Pair components.
Product Range
The following preassembled twisted-pair cables are available:
Table 4-11 Twisted-Pair Cable Products
Cable
Name
Use Suppliable
Lengths
Order number
TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45 TP patch cable with
2 RJ-45 plugs
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2GE50
6XV1 850-2GH10
6XV1 850-2GH20
6XV1 850-2GH60
6XV1 850-2GN10
TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45 Crossover TP cable with
2 RJ-45 plugs
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2HE50
6XV1 850-2HH10
6XV1 850-2HH20
6XV1 850-2HH60
6XV1 850-2HN10
TP cord 9/RJ-45 TP cable with one 9-pin sub-D connector
and one RJ-45 plug
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2JE50
6XV1 850-2JH10
6XV1 850-2JH20
6XV1 850-2JH60
6XV1 850-2 JN10
TP XP Cord 9/RJ-45 Crossover TP cable with one
9-pin sub-D connector and one RJ-45
plug
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2ME50
6XV1 850-2MH10
6XV1 850-2MH20
6XV1 850-2MH60
6XV1 850-2MN10
TP Cord 9-45/RJ-45 TP cable with one RJ-45 plug and one
sub-D connector with 45ocable outlet
(only for OSM/ESM)
1.0 m 6XV1 850-2NH10
TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ-45 Crossover TP cable with one RJ-45 plug
and one sub-D connector with 45ocable
outlet (only for OSM/ESM)
1.0 m 6XV1 850-2PH10
TP XP cord 9/9 Crossover TP cable for direct linking of
two Industrial Ethernet network
components with ITP port with two 9-pin
sub-D connectors
1.0 m 6XV1850-2RH10
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-25
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Table 4-11 Twisted-Pair Cable Products
Cable
Name
Order numberSuppliable
Lengths
Use
TP Cord RJ-45/15 TP cable with one 15-pin sub-D
connector and one RJ-45 plug
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2LE50
6XV1 850-2LH10
6XV1 850-2LH20
6XV1 850-2LH60
6XV1 850-2LN10
TP XP Cord RJ-45/15 Crossover TP cable with one
15-pin sub-D connector and one RJ-45
plug
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2SE50
6XV1 850-2SH10
6XV1 850-2SH20
6XV1 850-2SH60
6XV1 850-2SN10
For a complete list of the order numbers, refer to the catalog IK PI
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-26 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Areas of Application
The following tables show the available cables and their applications.
S7-400
S7-300
NC
Network component
Preassembled TP Cord
Connector
Sub-D-9
RJ-45
Connector
Sub-D-15
RJ-45
TP Cord 9/RJ-45
TP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP Cord RJ-45/15
Figure 4-7 Direct Link between a DTE and a Network Component
NC
Network component
Preassembled crossover TP Cord
Connector
Sub-D-9
RJ-45
Connector
Sub-D-9
RJ-45
TP XP Cord 9/RJ-45
TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP XP Cord 9/9
NC
Network component
Figure 4-8 Direct Link between Two Network Components
S7-400
S7-300
Preassembled crossover TP Cord
Connector
Sub-D-15
RJ-45
Connector
Sub-D-15
RJ-45
TP XP Cord RJ-45/15
TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15
S7-400
S7-300
Figure 4-9 Direct Link between Two DTEs
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-27
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
S7-400
NC
Network component,
for example OSM
FC cable
FC TP Standard Cable
FC TP Trailing Cable
FC TP Marine Cable
CP 443-1
PC
Sub-D-15
RJ-45
Connector
Sub-D-9
RJ-45
Connector
TP Cord 9/RJ-45
TP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP Cord RJ-45/15
TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP Cord TP Cord
Outlet RJ-45
Figure 4-10 Structured Cabling between a DTE and a Network Component
NC
Network component
FC cable
FC TP Standard Cable
FC TP Trailing Cable
FC TP Marine Cable
Sub-D-9
RJ-45
Connector
Sub-D-9
RJ-45
Connector
TP XP Cord 9/RJ-45
TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP Cord 9/RJ-45
TP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP Cord TP Cord
Outlet RJ-45 NC
Network component
Figure 4-11 Structured Cabling between Two Network Components
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-28 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
FC cable
FC TP Standard Cable
FC TP Trailing Cable
FC TP Marine Cable
PC
Sub-D-15
RJ-45
Connector
Sub-D-15
RJ-45
Connector
TP XP Cord RJ-45/15
TP XP RJ-45/RJ-45
TP Cord RJ-45/15
TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP Cord TP Cord
Outlet RJ-45
S7-300
S7-300
Figure 4-12 Structured Cabling between Two DTEs
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-29
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Pinning
3
6
1
2
3
6
1
2
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD--
TD+
TD--
RD+
RD--
Function
DTE
Casing, Shield Pin FunctionPin
white
blue
orange
a) Pinning of the TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
b) Pinning of the TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
3
6
1
2
3
6
1
2
RD+
RD--
TD+
TD--
RD+
RD--
TD+
TD--
Function
Casing, Shield Pin
Function
Pin
white
blue
c) Pinning of the TP Cord 9/RJ-45
3
6
1
2
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD--
Casing, Shield Pin Function
9-pin sub-D connector RJ-45 Connector
Network component DTE
5
9
1
6
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD--
Function Pin
white
RJ-45 Connector RJ-45 Connector
Network component
RJ-45 Connector RJ-45 Connector
DTE DTE
orange
white
white
blue
orange
white
Figure 4-13 Pinning of TP Cords
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-30 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5
9
1
6
3
6
1
2
TD+
TD--
RD+
RD--
Function
Network component
Pin FunctionPin
d) Pinning of the TP XP Cord 9/RJ-45
e) Pinning of the TP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
3
6
1
2
RD+
RD--
TD+
TD--
Function
Casing, Shield
Pin
Function
Pin
white
blue
f) Pinning of the TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
3
6
1
2
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
Casing, Shield
Pin Function
9-pin sub-D connector RJ-45 Connector
Network component
5
9
1
6
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD-
Function Pin
RJ-45 Connector
Network component
RJ-45 Connector
DTE
orange
white
white
blue
orange
white
9-pin sub-D connector
9-pin sub-D connector
5
9
1
6
Casing, Shield
white
blue
orange
white
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD-
Network component
Network component
Figure 4-14 Pinning of TP Cords
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-31
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1
6
5
9
Function
Network component
Pin FunctionPin
g) Pinning of the TP XP Cord 9/9
h) Pinning of the TP Cord 15/RJ-45
3
6
1
2
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
Function
Casing, Shield
Pin Function
Pin
white
blue
i) Pinning of the TP XP Cord 15/RJ-45
3
6
1
2
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
Casing, Shield
Pin Function
15-pin
sub-D male connector
RJ-45 Connector
5
12
3
10
Function Pin
Network component
RJ-45 Connector
DTE
orange
white
white
blue
orange
white
15-pin sub-D connector
5
12
3
10
Casing, Shield
white
blue
orange
white
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD-
Network compon
e
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
1
6
5
9
9-pin
sub-D
connector
9-pin
sub-D connector
6
7
converting
AUI/ITP port
Coding jumper for
6
7
DTE DTE
converting
AUI/ITP port
Coding jumper for
RD+
RD-
TD+
TD-
Figure 4-15 Pinning of TP Cords
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-32 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.5.3 Twisted-Pair Port Converter
General
Port converters are used to connect a DTE with an RJ-45 port to the Industrial
Twisted Pair cabling system.
The port converter has an RJ-45 connector at one end to connect to the DTE and
a 15-pin sub-D female connector with a slide locking mechanism at the other end.
The male and female connector are connected by a short TP cord. This converts
the RJ-45 port of the DTE to an Industrial Twisted Pair DTE port. Up to 90 m long,
double shielded ITP standard cables can be connected to the 15-pin sub-D female
connector and can be installed in areas with high EMI.
Mounting Bracket
The sub-D female connector has a mounting bracket. This allows the socket to be
fixed in place. The mounting bracket has two functions:
SStrain relief
The TP cord and the RJ-45 port on the DTE are protected from tensile strain.
SGrounding
The mounting bracket is electrically connected with the casing of the female
connector and therefore also with the cable shields. The bracket should be
screwed to a grounded plate or rail ensuring good contact.
Product Range
Table 4-12 TP Converter Cord 15/RJ-45 Data
Cable
Name
Use Suppliable
Lengths
Order number
TP converter cord 15/RJ-45 TP patch cable for
attachment of DTEs with an
RJ-45 port to the ITP cabling
system;
with one 15-pin sub-D female
connector with slide locking
mechanism and one RJ-45
plug
0.5 m
2m
6XV1850-2EE50
6XV1850-2EH20
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-33
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Pinning
1
2
3
6
3
10
5
12
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD-
Casing, Shield
Pin Function
RJ-45 Connector
15-pin sub-D female
Pin
white
blue
orange
TD+
TD-
RD+
RD-
Function
DTE ITP cable to
network component
white
Figure 4-16 Pinning of the TP Converter Cord 15/RJ-45
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-34 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.6 Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D Connectors
General
The Industrial Twisted Pair sub-D connectors correspond to the standards
MIL-C-24308 and DIN 41652. Due to its mechanical strength and its excellent
electromagnetic compatibility, this connector was preferred to the RJ-45 connector
recommended for 10BASE-T in IEEE 802.3.
Two versions of the connector are available:
SPreassembled (crimped)
SFor assembly by the user
Design of the Connectors for User Assembly
The following sections describe only the connectors that can be assembled by the
user.
There are two versions of the Industrial Twisted Pair sub-D connectors for user
assembly:
S9-pin connector with straight cable outlet and securing screws
S15-pin connector with variable cable outlet (+30°,0°,-30°) and securing bolts
Both connector types have a metal casing. The Industrial Twisted Pair cables are
connected to the connector pins using screw terminals, special tools are not
required.
For a detailed description of fitting connectors, refer to Section 7.9.
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-35
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D Connector 9-pin
SIntended for connecting:
-- OLM/ELM (ports 1-3)
-- OSM/ESM (ports 1-6, standby-sync port)
-- Interface card ECTP3 (ports 1-3) for star coupler (ASGE)
SConnector casing with straight cable outlet
SCan be mechanically secured to the female connector with integrated knurled
screws
SSimple cable assembly with screw terminals
Cover
Cable clamp
Connector casing
Connector insert
Knurled screw
Screw terminal
5916
Figure 4-17 Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D connector (9-pin) for Assembly on Site
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-36 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D Connector 15-pin
SFor connection to DTEs with an integrated Industrial Twisted Pair port
SCable casing with variable cable insertion angle
+30°,0°,-30°
SSlide mechanism for locking to female connector
STwo dummy plugs for closing unused cable outlets
SSimple cable assembly with screw terminals
SInternal coding jumper for converting the DTE port from AUI to Industrial
Twisted Pair
Cover
Connector insert
Connector casing
Cable clamp
Dummy plugs
512 310
Figure 4-18 Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D Connector (15-pin) for Assembly on Site
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-37
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.7 RJ-45 Connector
The RJ-45 plug is an 8-pin plug designed in compliance with ISO/IEC 8877:1992.
This type of connector is recommended in IEEE 802.3 for 10BASE-T and
100BASE–TX. The RJ-45 connector is used mainly in an environment with low
EMI levels (for example in offices). This connector was developed by Western
Electric and is also known as the Western plug.
The RJ-45 connector cannot be ordered separately and is supplied only with
preassembled cables (TP cord).
SConnector casing with straight cable outlet
SIntended for connecting:
-- DTEs with an RJ-45 port and
-- network components with an RJ-45 port
RJ-45 Connector System
18
1
8
Figure 4-19 RJ-45 Jack and Plug
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-38 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4.8 Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
General
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 is used to implement the transition of the
robust Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables used in the industrial environment to
preassembled TP Cord cables using an RJ-45 jack. When used with FC TP cables
and preassembled TP Cords, the Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 saves
considerable time during installation.
Color coding prevents errors when connecting the wires. The Industrial Ethernet
FC Outlet RJ-45 corresponds to category 5 of the international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173.
Design
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 consists of a robust metal casing. The
screw on cover ensures reliable shield contact and strain relief for the Industrial
Ethernet FC cable.
The outlet RJ-45 has the following terminals:
S4 insulation-piercing contacts for connecting the Industrial Ethernet FC cable
(contacts color-coded)
SRJ-45 jack with dust protection cap for connecting various TP Cord cables.
Figure 4-20 Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-39
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Installation
The FC Outlet RJ-45 is suitable both for installation on a standard rail and for wall
installation. The outlet has four holes to allow wall installation.
By arranging several FC Outlet RJ-45 devices in a line, you can create a patch
panel with any terminal density you require (for example 16 outlets to a width of
19” is possible with a suitably wide rail). The FC Outlet RJ-45 can also be installed
behind a metal panel with a suitable cutout (for example in a wiring closet).
Example of an Application
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 is attached directly to the Industrial
Ethernet FC TP cable. To connect the FC Outlet RJ-45 and network components
or a DTE, various preassembled RJ-45 patch cables are available.
OSM
DTE
TP Cord
RJ-45/RJ-45
e.g. FC TP Standard Cable
TP Cord
FC Outlet RJ-45
FC Outlet RJ-45
DTE
TP Cord
FC Outlet RJ-45
Figure 4-21 System Configuration with FC Outlet RJ-45
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-40 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Pinning of the FC Outlet RJ-45
The contacts of the RJ-45 jack and the insulation-piercing terminals for the FC TP
cable are assigned to each other as follows:
RJ-45 pin
b
Insulation piercing terminals
number Number Wire color
1 1 yellow
2 3 orange
3 2 white
6 4 blue
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-41
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Technical Specifications
Table 4-13 FC Outlet RJ-45 Technical Specifications
Ports
SAttachment of DTEs, network components
SAttachment of Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables
RJ-45 jack
4 insulation-piercing terminals
Installation Standard rail or wall installation
Permitted environmental conditions
SOperating temperature
SStorage/transport temperature
-- 2 5 °Cto+70°C
-- 4 0 °Cto+70°C
Construction
SDimensions (W x H x D) in mm
SWeight
107x31.7x30
300 g
Degree of protection IP20
Transmission characteristics Corresponding to category 5 of the
international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173
Ordering Data:
Table 4-14 Ordering Data of the FC Outlet RJ-45
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
For connecting Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables
and TP Cords
6GK1 901-1FC00 0AA0
Passive Components for Electrical Networks
4-42 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Passive Components for Optical Networks
Chapter Overview
5.1 Optical Transmission Technique 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Glass Fiber-Optic Cables 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Fiber-Optic Standard Cable 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 INDOOR Fiber-Optic Cable 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Flexible Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Special Cables 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Connectors for Glass Fiber-Optic Cables 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
AChapterPassive Components for Optical Networks
5-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.1 Optical Transmission Technique
Fiber-Optic Cables (FO)
On fiber-optic cables (FO) data is transmitted by modulating electromagnetic
waves in the range of visible and invisible light. The material used is high-quality
glass fiber.
This section describes only the SIMATIC NET fiber-optic cables intended for
Industrial Ethernet. The various FO types allow flexible solutions with which
components can be interconnected depending on the operating and environmental
conditions.
Compared with electrical cables, fiber-optic cables have the following advantages:
Advantages
SElectrical isolation of nodes and segments
SNo grounding problems
SNo shield currents
STransmission path immune to external electromagnetic noise
SNo lightning protection required
SNo noise emission along the transmission path
SLight weight
SDepending on the fiber type, cables several kilometers long can be used even
at higher transmission rates.
Point-to-Point Link
Fiber-optic technology only allows the implementation of point-to-point links; in
other words, one transmitter is connected to only one receiver. The transmission
path between two nodes requires two fibers (one for each transmission direction).
All SIMATIC NET standard fiber-optic cables are therefore designed as duplex
cables.
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.2 Glass Fiber-Optic Cables
Designed for Industry
SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables (FO) are available in various designs
allowing optimum adaptation to a wide range of applications.
Areas of Application
Fiber-optic standard cable
SUniversal cable for use indoors and outdoors
INDOOR fiber-optic cable
SFree of halogens, can be walked on, and extremely flame-retardant FO cable
for use in buildings
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable
SSpecially designed for non-stationary use, for example with moving machinery
SIENOPYR duplex marine fiber-optic cable
SHybrid cable consisting of two fibers and two additional copper wires
for fixed installation on ships and offshore facilities
SIMATIC NET Standard Fibers
In glass fiber-optic cables, SIMATIC NET uses a fiber with 62.5 µm diameter as its
standard fiber. SIMATIC NET bus components are ideally matched to these
standard fibers allowing large distances to be covered while keeping the
configuration rules simple.
Simple Configuration
All the descriptions and operating instructions for SIMATIC NET bus components
contain information about the distances that can be covered with the standard
fibers described above. You can configure your optical network without
complicated calculations using simple limit values (refer to Chapter 3 “Network
Configuration”).
Guidelines for Laying Cables
You will find information about laying SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables in
Section 7.7 in this manual.
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Technical Specifications
Tables 5-1 and 5-2 provide an overview of the technical specifications of all
SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables.
Table 5-1 Technical Specifications of the INDOOR Fiber-Optic Cable and Fiber-Optic Standard Cable
Cable Type Fiber-Optic
Standard Cable INDOOR Fiber-Optic
Cable
Areas of application Universal cable for use indoors
and outdoors Halogen-free and extremely
flame-retardant cable for indoor
use that can be walked on
Available as Preassembled cable with 4
BFOC connectors in fixed
lengths, also available in meters
Preassembled cable with 4
BFOC connectors in fixed
lengths
Cable type
(standard designation) AT-VYY 2G62.5/125
3.1B200+0.8F600 F I-VHH 2G62.5/125
3.2B200+0.9F600 F
TB3 FRNC OR
Fiber type Multimode graded fiber 62.5/125
µmMultimode graded fiber 62.5/125
µm
Power loss at 850 nm
Power loss at 1300 nm <= 3.1 dB/km
<= 0.8 dB/km <= 3.2 dB/km
<= 0.9 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 850 nm
at 1300 nm 200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km 200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km
Number of fibers 2 2
Cable Structures Splittable
outdoor cable Splittable
indoor cable
Core type Compact core Fixed core
Basic element materials PVC, gray Copolymer, orange
(FRNC)
Strain relief Aramid yarn and
impregnated glass fiber yarn Aramid yarn
Outer sheath/
color of cable PVC/black Copolymer/
bright orange (FRNC)
Dimensions of
basic element (3.5 ± 0.2) mm ∅2.9 mm ∅
Outer dimensions (6.3 x 9.8) ± 0.4 mm approx. 3.9 x 6.8 mm
Cable weight approx. 74 kg/km approx. 30 kg/km
Permitted tensile stress <= 370 N (in operation)
<= 500 N (brief) <=200 N (in operation)
<= 800 N (brief)
Bend Radius 100 mm
Only the flat surface 100 mm (during installation)
60 mm (in operation)
Only the flat surface
Transverse compressive strength 5,000 N/10 cm 3,000 N/10 cm (brief)
1,000 N/10 cm (permanent)
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Table 5-1 Technical Specifications of the INDOOR Fiber-Optic Cable and Fiber-Optic Standard Cable
Cable Type INDOOR Fiber-Optic
Cable
Fiber-Optic
Standard Cable
Impact strength 3 blows
(initial energy: 5 Nm
hammer radius: 300 mm)
3 blows
(initial energy: 1.5 Nm
hammer radius: 300 mm)
Installation temperature -5°C to +50°C -5°C to +50°C
Operating temperature -25°C to +60°C -20°C to +60°C
Storage temperature -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
Behavior in fire Flame-retardant complying
with IEC 60332-3 cat. CF Flame-retardant complying with
IEC 60332-3 and DIN VDE 0472
Part 804, test type B
Free of halogens no yes
UL approval no no
Ship building approval no no
Table 5-2 Technical Specifications of the Flexible Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable and the SIENOPYR Duplex
Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
Cable Type Flexible Fiber-Optic
Trailing Cable SIENOPYR
Duplex Fiber-Optic
Marine Cable
Areas of application Flexible cable for installation in a
drag chain indoors and outdoors Fixed installation on ships and
offshore facilities in all enclosed
spaces and on free decks
Available as Preassembled cable with 4
BFOC connectors in fixed
lengths, also available in meters
Sold in meters
Cable type
(standard code) AT-W11Y (ZN)
11Y2G62.5/125
3,1B200+0.8F600 LG
MI-VHH 2G 62.5/125
3,1B200 + 0.8F600 +
2x1CU 300 V
Fiber type Multimode graded fiber 62.5/125
µmMultimode graded fiber 62.5/125
µm
Power loss at 850 nm
Power loss at 1300 nm <= 3.1 dB/km
<= 0.8 dB/km <= 3.1 dB/km
<= 0.8 dB/km
Modal bandwidth at 850 nm
at 1300 nm 200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km 200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km
Number of fibers 2 2
Cable Structures Splittable
outdoor cable Splittable
outdoor cable
Core type Hollow core, filled Solid core
Basic element materials PUR, black Polyolefin
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Table 5-2 Technical Specifications of the Flexible Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable and the SIENOPYR Duplex
Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
Cable Type SIENOPYR
Duplex Fiber-Optic
Marine Cable
Flexible Fiber-Optic
Trailing Cable
Strain relief GFK central element, Aramid
yarn Aramid yarn
Outer sheath/color of cable PUR, black SHF1 mixture/black
Dimensions of basic element (3. ± 0.2) mm ∅(2.9 ± 0.2) mm ∅
Outer dimensions approx. 12.9 mm (13.3 ± 0.5) mm
Cable weight approx. 136 kg/km approx. 220 kg/km
Permitted tensile stress <= 2000 N (brief)
<=1000 N (permanent) <= 500 N (brief)
<= 250 N (permanent)
Bend Radius 150 mm
Max. 100,000 bending cycles 133 mm (single)
266 mm (multiple)
Installation temperature -5°C to +50°C -10°C to +50°C
Operating temperature -25°C to +60°C -40°C to +80°C 1)
-40°C to +70°C 2)
Storage temperature -25°C to +70°C -40°C to +80°C
Resistance to fire Complying with IEC 60332-1 Complying with IEC 60332-3 cat.
A
Free of halogens no yes
UL approval no no
Ship building approval no yes
1) With no load on copper cores
2) With maximum load on copper cores (6 A)
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.2.1 Fiber-Optic Standard Cable
Outer sheath black PVC
Inner sheath gray PVC
Support element (impregnated glass yarn)
Kevlar yarn
Glass fiber G62.5/125 µm
Figure 5-1 Structure of the Fiber-Optic Standard Cable
Fiber-Optic Standard Cable 6XV1820-5****
The fiber-optic standard cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type
62.5/125 µm.
The outer sheath is labeled “SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FIBER-OPTIC 6XV1
820-5AH10” approximately every 50 cm. Meter markers consisting of a vertical line
and a 4-figure number make it easier to estimate the length of an installed cable.
Properties
The fiber-optic standard cable has the following properties:
SCan be walked on
SFlame-retardant complying with IEC 60332-3 cat. CF
SNot halogen free
SAvailable in meter lengths up to 4000 m
SAvailable preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors in lengths up to 1000 m
Application
The fiber-optic standard cable is the universal cable for use indoors and outdoors.
It is suitable for connecting optical ports operating at the wavelengths of 850 nm
and 1300 nm.
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.2.2 INDOOR Fiber-Optic Cable
Outer sheath Copolymer FRNC, bright orange
Inner sheath Copolymer FRNC, gray
Aramid strain relief elements
FRNC core sleeve
Glass fiber G62.5/125 µm
Figure 5-2 Structure of the INDOOR Fiber-Optic Cable
INDOOR Fiber-Optic cable 6XV1820-7****
The INDOOR fiber-optic cable contains two multimode graded fibers 62.5/125 µm.
The outer sheath is labeled “SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDOOR FIBER OPTIC
6XV1 820-7AH10 FRNC” at intervals of approximately 50 cm. Meter markers
consisting of a vertical line and a 4-figure number make it easier to estimate the
length of an installed cable.
Properties
The INDOOR fiber-optic cable has the following properties:
SCan be walked on
SFlame-retardant complying with IEC 60332-3 and DIN VDE 0472 Part 804, test
type B
SIs free of halogens
SPreassembled with 4 BFOC connectors in lengths from 0.5 m to 100 m.
Application
The INDOOR fiber-optic cable is intended for use indoors in areas protected from
the weather. It is suitable for connecting optical ports operating at the wavelengths
of 850 nm and 1300 nm.
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.2.3 Flexible Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable
Outer sheath
Inner sheath
Support element
Aramid yarn
Glass fiber G 62.5/125 µm
Aramid yarn
Blind element
Fleece/strands
Figure 5-3 Structure of the Flexible Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable
Flexible Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable 6XV1820-6****
The flexible fiber-optic trailing cable contains two multimode graded fibers 62.5/125
µm. Integrated blind elements produce a round cross-section.
The outer sheath is labeled “SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FLEXIBLE FIBER OPTIC
6XV1 820-6AH10” at intervals of approximately 50 cm. Meter markers consisting of
a vertical line and a 4-figure number make it easier to estimate the length of an
installed cable.
Properties
The flexible fiber-optic trailing cable has the following properties:
SHighly flexible (100,000 bending cycles at a minimum bend radius of 150 mm)
SNot halogen free
SAvailable in meter lengths for up to 2000 m
SAvailable preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors in fixed lengths up to 650 m
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Application
The flexible fiber-optic trailing cable was developed for applications in which the
cable must be flexible enough to move, for example when attached to moving
machine parts (drag chains). The cable is designed for 100,000 bending cycles
through ± 90° (at the specified minimum bend radius). The trailing cable can be
used both indoors and outdoors. It is suitable for connecting optical ports operating
at the wavelengths of 850 nm and 1300 nm.
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-11
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
!Warning
During installation and operation, all the mechanical restrictions such as bend
radii, tensile strain etc. must be adhered to. If these limits are exceeded,
permanent deterioration of the transmission characteristics may result that can
cause temporary or permanent failure of data transmission.
Figure 5-4 Example of Using the Glass Fiber-Optic Trailing Cable in a Drag Chain
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-12 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.2.4 SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
Copper wire
Insulation
Optical fiber
Strain relief
Protective sleeve
Winding
Copper braid
Common sheath
Outer sheath
Figure 5-5 Structure of the SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable 6XV1 830-0NH10
The SIENOPYR duplex fiber-optic marine cable contains two multimode graded
fibers 62.5/125 µm. The cable also contains two stranded, rubber-insulated copper
wires with a 1 mm2 cross-sectional area. These can be used, for example, to
supply power to the attached devices.
The round cross-section of the cable makes it easier to seal cable glands.
The outer sheath is labeled with the year of manufacture and the label
“SIENOPYR-FR MI-VHH 2G 62.5/125 3,1B200+0,8F600+2x1CU 300V” at
intervals of approximately 50 cm.
Properties
The SIENOPYR duplex fiber-optic marine cable has the following properties:
SOzone proof complying with DIN VDE 0472 Part 805 test type B
SBehavior in fire complying with IEC 60332-3 cat. A
SCorrosivity of combustion gases complying with IEC 60754-2
SSmoke density complying with IEC 61034
SIs free of halogens
SIs approved for ship building (GL, LRS, RINA)
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-13
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Application
The SIENOPYR duplex marine fiber-optic able is intended for fixed installation on
ships and offshore facilities in all enclosed spaces and on open decks. It is suitable
for connecting optical ports operating at the wavelengths of 850 nm and 1300 nm.
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-14 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.2.5 Special Cables
Special Cables
In addition to the SIMATIC NET standard fiber-optic cables described in the
Catalog IK PI, numerous special cables and accessories are also available. Listing
all the versions available is beyond the scope of the catalog and of this manual.
The technical specifications of the SIMATIC NET bus components indicate which
SIMATIC NET fiber-optic cable is the normal connecting cable and which other
fiber types are suitable.
Note
Remember that the distances that can be covered differ if you use fibers with other
core diameters or attenuation characteristics than those listed in the operating
instructions.
Fiber Types
In addition to the standard SIMATIC NET fiber types, the following fiber types are
often used:
S50µm Fiber
This fiber is used particularly in Europe in Telecom applications instead of the
62.5 µm fiber. The smaller core diameter means that less power can be coupled
into the fiber and reduces the distance that can be covered.
Cable Structures
For special applications, numerous variations in the cable structure are available,
for example:
SBundled cores (cables with hollow cords capable of accommodating several
fibers)
SCables with rodent protection for underground installation
SHalogen-free cables, for example for use in underground train systems
SHybrid cable with fibers and copper conductors in one sheath
SCertified cables, for example for use on ships
Ordering
If you require fiber-optic cables for particular applications, please contact your
Siemens representative (see Appendix LEERER MERKER).
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-15
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5.3 Connectors for Glass Fiber-Optic Cables
BFOC Connectors for Glass Fiber-Optic Cables
In Industrial Ethernet fiber-optic networks, only BFOC connectors are used for
glass fiber-optic cables.
Figure 5-6 BFOC Connectors with Dust Caps
Fitting Connectors on Site
If it is necessary to fit connectors on site,
- SIEMENS provides this service (see Appendix LEERER MERKER)
- BFOC connectors and special tools can be ordered (see IK PI).
Note
Connectors should only be fitted to glass fiber-optic cables by trained personnel.
When fitted correctly, they allow extremely low coupling attenuation and the value
can be repeated after inserting the connector several times.
Preassembled Cables
To be able to use glass fiber-optic cables with untrained personnel, glass fiber-optic
cables are also available with four BFOC connectors already fitted.
For ordering data, please refer to the current SIMATIC NET Catalog IK PI.
Passive Components for Optical Networks
5-16 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
!Caution
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical
damage. Protect open connections with the supplied dust caps.
Note
Only remove the dust cap immediately before establishing the connection.
6-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Active Components and Topologies
Chapter Overview
6.1 Electrical and Optical Link Modules (ELM, OLM) 6-2.....................
6.1.1 Components of the Product 6-5.......................................
6.1.2 Installation 6-5.....................................................
6.1.3 Description of the Functions 6-5......................................
6.1.3.1 General Functions 6-5...............................................
6.1.3.2 Functions Specific to the ITP Interface 6-7.............................
6.1.3.3 Functions Specific to the Fiber-Optic Interface 6-8......................
6.1.4 Topologies 6-8......................................................
6.1.4.1 Bus Structure 6-9...................................................
6.1.4.2 Redundant Ring Structure with Industrial Ethernet OLMs 6-10.............
6.2 Optical and Electrical Switch Modules (OSM/ESM) 6-11..................
6.2.1 Application 6-11.....................................................
6.2.2 Design 6-12.........................................................
6.2.3 Functions 6-13......................................................
6.2.4 Bus Topologies with the OSM/ESM 6-15................................
6.2.5 Redundant Ring Structure 6-17........................................
6.2.6 Linking Subnets Using the OSM/ESM 6-19..............................
6.2.7 Redundant Linking of Subnets Using the OSM/ESM 6-20.................
6.2.8 Components of the OSM/ESM 6-21....................................
6.2.9 Network Management of the OSM/ESM 6-22............................
6.3 ASGE Active Star Coupler 6-24........................................
6.4 MINI OTDE Optical Transceiver 6-26...................................
6.4.1 Overview 6-26.......................................................
6.4.2 The Product and Ordering Data 6-27...................................
6.4.3 Functions 6-27......................................................
6.4.4 Topologies with the MINI OTDE 6-27...................................
6.5 Mini UTDE Electrical Transceiver (RJ-45) 6-29...........................
6.5.1 Overview 6-29.......................................................
6.5.2 The Product and Ordering Data 6-30...................................
6.5.3 Functions 6-30......................................................
6.5.4 Topologies with the Mini UTDE RJ-45 6-31..............................
6
Active Components and Topologies
6-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.1 Electrical and Optical Link Modules (ELM, OLM)
Figure 6-1 Industrial Ethernet OLM
Figure 6-2 Industrial Ethernet ELM
Active Components and Topologies
6-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Overview
The SIMATIC NET link modules for Industrial Ethernet allow flexible configuration
of Ethernet networks complying with the IEEE 802.3 standard using fiber-optic or
copper cables. The transmission rate on all interfaces is 10Mbps. The link modules
are fitted on to a standard rail.
The OLMs (Optical Link Modules) have three Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) ports
and two optical ports (BFOC). With ITP, up to three DTEs or further ITP segments
can be connected; with fiber-optic cable, connection of up to two further DTEs or
optical network components (OLM, star coupler with ECFL2 (Extension Card Fiber
Link) etc.) are possible.
The ELMs (Electrical Link Modules) also have an AUI port in addition to the three
Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) ports. An Ethernet segment with triaxial cable can be
connected to the AUI port via a 727-1 drop cable and a transceiver.
Both modules conform to the specifications of the IEEE 802.3 /1/ standard.
Active Components and Topologies
6-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Note
Since the beginning of 1998, the Optical Link Module (OLM) is supplied as version
2.0. Version 2.0 includes the following improvements compared with the previous
version:
-- Redundancy control is not dependent on the load distribution in the network
-- The diagnostic LEDs also indicate the segmentation of a port; this changed the
display patterns of the link status LEDs (LS LEDs)
-- The signal contact also indicates the segmentation of a port
The differences are explained in detail in the relevant sections in this manual.
Both versions are fully compatible and can be installed in a system in any
combination.
The OLM version can be found on the type plate on the right-hand side panel (see
Figure 6-3)
SIMATIC NET
OLM f. Industrial Ethernet
6GK1102-4AA00
DIL Switch Settings:
Port1..Port5
LA1 ... LA5 Link Alarm
Disabled
Enabled
0
1
Port 5
SIMATIC NET
Industrial Ethernet OLM
Version 2.0
6GK1102-4AA00
DIL Switch Settings:
Port1..Port5
LA1 ... LA5 Link Alarm
Disabled
Enabled
0
1
Port 5
OLM Version 1 OLM Version 2
Figure 6-3 Type Plates of OLM Version 1 and Version 2.0
!Warning
The OLM/ELM devices are designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage
(SELV). This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with IEC
950/EN 60950/VDE 0805 may be connected to the power supply terminals and the
signal contact.
Active Components and Topologies
6-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.1.1 Components of the Product
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OLM/ELM including
STerminal block for the power supply
SDescription and operating instructions
Order number
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OLM 6GK1102-4AA00
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet ELM 6GK1102-5AA00
6.1.2 Installation
The SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OLM/ELM is clipped on to a standard rail.
The modules can be installed vertically one beside the other without gaps.
Unobstructed convection of the surrounding air must be assured, in particular, air
must be able to circulate through the ventilation openings at the top and bottom.
6.1.3 Description of the Functions
6.1.3.1 General Functions
Signal Regeneration
The OLM/ELM regenerates the signal shape and amplitude of the received data.
Retiming
To prevent jitter increasing from segment to segment, the OLM/ELM retimes the
data to be transmitted.
Preamble Regeneration
If preamble bits of received data are lost, the OLM/ELM pads out the preamble to
64 bits (including the start of frame delimiter (SFD)).
Fragment Extension
Short fragments can result from collisions. If the OLM/ELM receives a fragment,
this is extended to a minimum length of 96 bits. This ensures reliable collision
detection by all nodes.
Active Components and Topologies
6-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Handling Collisions
If the OLM/ELM detects a data collision, it stops transmission. During the collision,
the data packet that has collided is replaced by a jam signal (0/1 bit pattern) to
ensure that the DTEs recognize the collision.
Auto Partitioning
A breakdown on the network can be caused by jabber lockup, wire breaks, missing
terminating resistors, damaged cable insulation, and frequent collisions due to
electromagnetic interference. To protect the network from these breakdowns, the
OLM disconnects the segment from the remainder of the network in the receive
direction.
On the OLM/ELM, this partitioning function operates separately for each port. You
can continue to operate other ports without any problems if one of the ports has
been partitioned. When a segment has been partitioned, the module continues to
transmit to the ITP segment or to the optical fiber cable but reception at this port is
disabled.
On twisted pair, the partitioning is active in the following situations:
-- When a data collision lasts longer than 105 µsor
-- more than 64 data collisions occur in succession.
On optical fiber cable, the partitioning is active in the following situations
-- When a data collision lasts longer than 1.5 ms (normal mode) or 0.2 ms
(redundant mode) or
-- When more than 64 (normal mode) or 16 (redundant mode) data collisions
occur in succession.
Reconnection
The segment is reconnected to the network as soon as a packet with the minimum
length of 51 µs is received at the port where collisions were occurring; in other
words when the segment is operating correctly again.
With the OLM version 2.0 in the redundant mode, packets longer than 51 µs sent
without a collision occurring also lead to reconnection.
Active Components and Topologies
6-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Jabber Lockup Protection
The network can be tied up continuously with data, for example due to a defective
transceiver or LAN controller. To protect the network from this situation, the
OLM/ELM stops reception as follows:
-- At the ITP or AUI port affected after 5.5 ms.
The interruption is canceled after an idle phase of 9.6 µs.
-- At the fiber-optic port affected after 3.9 ms.
The interruption is canceled after 420 ms of problem-free operation.
6.1.3.2 Functions Specific to the ITP Interface
Link Control
The OLM/ELM monitors the connected ITP line segments for short-circuits or
breaks using regular link test pulses complying with the IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
standard. The OLM/ELM does not send data to an ITP segment from which it does
not receive a link test pulse.
Note
An unused port is evaluated as a line break. The ITP link to a DTE that is turned
off is also evaluated as a line break since the transceiver cannot send link test
pulses without a power supply.
Auto Polarity Exchange
If the pair of receive lines is connected incorrectly (RD+ and RD-- swapped over),
the polarity is reversed automatically.
Active Components and Topologies
6-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.1.3.3 Functions Specific to the Fiber-Optic Interface
Standardization
The two fiber-optic ports on the underside of the OLM comply with the IEEE 802.3
standard: 10BASE-FL. These are implemented as two BFOC female connectors
for connection of glass fiber-optic cables (62.5/125 µm or 50/125 µm). The
operating wavelength is 850 nm.
Fiber-Optic Monitoring
The OLM monitors the connected ITP line segments for breaks using regular link
test pulses. The OLM does not send data to a fiber-optic cable from which it is not
receiving a link test pulse.
Redundancy
In areas in which data reliability is the most important factor, redundancy can
ensure that data exchange is continued despite the breakdown of a fiber-optic
cable or an OLM. Often a standby cable is installed in a different cable duct. If a
fault occurs, data exchange is switched automatically from the main to the standby
line.
6.1.4 Topologies
A variety of topologies are possible with Industrial Ethernet OLMs and ELMs, as
follows:
SBus structure
SStar structure
SRedundant ring structure
SCombination of the basic structures listed above
Within these topologies, two structures (bus and redundant ring structure) can be
considered as the basic structures.
Active Components and Topologies
6-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.1.4.1 Bus Structure
ELM
OLM OLM OLM OLMELM
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
2. ITP XP standard cable 9/9
11
22
3. 727-1 drop cable
4. Triaxial cable
5. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
5
3
33
4
5
5
Figure 6-4 Bus Structure with OLMs and ELMs
Active Components and Topologies
6-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.1.4.2 Redundant Ring Structure with Industrial Ethernet OLMs
OLM OLMOLM OLM
1. ITP standard cable 9/15
2. TP cord 9/RJ-45
2
11
3
3. Fiber-optic cables
in the redundant mode
Figure 6-5 Redundant Ring with OLMs
For more detailed information about configuration and the way in which networks
function with these topologies refer to the chapter “Network Configuration”.
Note
The modules in the redundant ring can only be connected to each other on
fiber-optic cables.
Active Components and Topologies
6-11
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.2 Optical and Electrical Switch Modules (OSM/ESM)
Figure 6-6 Optical/Electrical Switch Modules (OSM/ESM)
6.2.1 Application
Overview
The OSM/ESM Optical/Electrical Switch Modules, version 2 allow the
cost-effective installation of switched networks operating at 100 Mbps.
By creating segments (dividing a network into subnets/segments) and
attaching these segments to an OSM/ESM it is possible to contain the load in
existing networks and to achieve an improvement in network performance.
The OSM/ESM allows you to create redundant Industrial Ethernet ring structures
using switching technology with fast medium redundancy (reconfiguration time
maximum 0.3 seconds).
To create an optical ring, OSMs with two FO ports are required.
To create an electrical ring, ports 7 and 8 of the ESM are interconnected using
Industrial Twisted Pair cables.
The data rate in the ring is 100 Mbps; a maximum of 50 OSMs/ESMs can be used.
In addition to the two ring ports, OSMs/ESMs have a further six ports (optionally
sub-D or RJ-45 ports), to which both DTEs and network segments can be
attached.
Several rings can be interconnected redundantly using the integrated standby
function.
Active Components and Topologies
6-12 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
There are three ways of signaling errors:
Svia the signal contact
Svia SNMP (traps)
Sby E-mail
6.2.2 Design
Casing, Installation
The Industrial Ethernet OSM and ESM has a sheet steel casing with degree of
protection IP20. They are suitable for the following types of installation:
SInstallation on a 35 mm DIN rail
SInstallation on a SIMATIC S7-300 rail
SInstallation in pairs in a 19” cubicle
SWall mounting
The modules can be installed vertically, one beside the other without gaps.
Unobstructed convection of surrounding air is essential, in particular air must be
able to circulate freely through the ventilation openings of the OSM/ESM.
Ports
All modules have a 6-pin terminal block for connecting the power supply
(redundant 24 V DC power supply) and the floating signal contact.
The mode and status information are displayed by a row of LEDs and a selection
button.
The Standby-Sync port is used to synchronize two modules when linking
redundant networks.
The OSMs/ESMs can be upgraded to new firmware revisions and can be assigned
parameters via the serial port.
Active Components and Topologies
6-13
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
The OSM/ESM has a total of eight LAN ports. Depending on the particular variant,
they have the following ports:
STwisted-pair port (sub-D): 10/100BASE-TX
9-pin sub-D female connector (ITP port), automatic data rate detection (10 or
100 Mbps) for connection of TP cables (max. length 100 m)
STwisted-pair port (RJ-45): 10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45 jack, automatic data rate detection (10 or 100 Mbps) for connection of
TP Cords (max. length 10 m, in conjunction with FC Outlets RJ-45 and
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cable (patch cabling) up to 100 m)
SGlass FOC: multimode (MM); 100BASE-FX BFOC
2 BFOC sockets per port, data rate 100 Mbps, for connection of multimode
FOC in environments with high EMI levels and for distances up to 3000 m
between two OSMs
SGlass FOC: single mode (SM); 100BASE-FX BFOC
2 BFOC sockets per port, data rate 100 Mbps, for connection of single mode
FOC in environments with high EMI levels and for distances up to 26 km
between two OSM ITP62-LD modules
6.2.3 Functions
Increased Network Performance
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) address of the DTEs, local
data traffic remains local, only data intended for nodes in another subnet is
forwarded by the OSM or ESM.
Simple Network Configuration and Network Expansion
A total network span of up to 150 km (OSM) or 5 km (ESM) presents no problem.
OSMs and ESMs store the data received at the ports and then direct it to the
destination address. The restriction of the network span resulting from collision
detection (CSMA/CD) ends at the OSM/ESM port.
Error Containment
The OSM/ESM limits the propagation of errors in a network to the subnet involved
because it forwards only valid data.
Integration of Ethernet Networks Operating at 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps
The OSM/ESM is suitable for the integration of existing subnets operating at 10
Mbps in Fast Ethernet networks operating at 100 Mbps.
The OSM/ESM automatically detects the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps) at the
twisted-pair ports as well full or half duplex operation.
Active Components and Topologies
6-14 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Fast Redundancy in the Ring
By interconnecting the ends of a bus using OSMs/ESMs to form a ring, reliable
communication can be achieved. With an OSM/ESM in the ring, the integrated
redundancy manager is activated using a DIP switch. The redundancy manager
constantly monitors the operation of the network.
It recognizes the failure of a section in the ring or of an OSM/ESM and activates
the substitute path within a maximum of 0.3 seconds.
Redundant Linking of Networks
The standby function integrated in the OSM/ESM allows the redundant linking of
two networks (ring or bus). To achieve this, two OSMs/ESMs are set as the
standby master/slave using a DIP switch in each network and their standby ports
connected to the corresponding OSM/ESM in the other network.
Priority for Forwarding Time-of-Day Frames
OSMs/ESMs recognize a SIMATIC NET time-of-day frame by its multicast address
09000601FFEFHand forward it with priority over other frames. Giving priority to
time-of-day frames minimizes their propagation time in the network and keeps this
as low as possible regardless of the network load.
Active Components and Topologies
6-15
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Variants of the OSM
Product Sub-D
9-pin
RJ-45 Multimode
FOC (MM)
Single mode
FOC (SM)
OSM ITP62 6-- 2--
OSM ITP53 5-- 3--
OSM TP62 -- 6 2 --
OSM ITP62-LD 6-- -- 2
Variants of the ESM
Product Sub-D
9-pin
RJ-45
ESM ITP80 8--
ESM TP80 -- 8
6.2.4 Bus Topologies with the OSM/ESM
Bus Structure
Bus structures can be implemented with OSMs/ESMs. The maximum cascading
depth is 50 OSMs/ESMs in series.
The entire segment lengths permitted for a port type (TP, FO) can be used.
Active Components and Topologies
6-16 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
4 ITP standard cable 9/15
3 TP cord 9/RJ-45
11
4
3
1 Fiber-Optic Cable (FO)
1
1
44
S7-400 S7-400
S7-300
PC
OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62 OSM ITP62OSM ITP53
OSM TP62
Figure6-7 BuswithOSMs
Apart from OSM ITP62-LD modules, all listed OSM variants can be used in any
combination in a bus consisting of OSMs. OSM ITP62-LD modules can only be
coupled with other OSM ITP62-LD modules via the optical ports (monomode fiber).
2 ITP XP standard cable 9/9
3 TP cord 9/RJ-45
22
4
3
4 ITP standard cable 9/15
2
44
S7-400 S7-400
S7-300
PC
ESM ITP80 ESM ITP80 ESM ITP80 ESM ITP80 ESM ITP80
2
Figure 6-8 Bus with ESMs
In a linear bus structure consisting of ESMs, you can use both ESM ITP80
modules as well as ESM TP80 modules (cables for linking the two variants are
available on request).
Active Components and Topologies
6-17
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.2.5 Redundant Ring Structure
Redundant Ring Structure with OSMs
With the aid of an OSM functioning as the redundancy manager (RM), the ends of
an optical bus made up of OSMs can be connected together to form a redundant
optical ring. The OSMs are connected together using ports 7 and 8.
The RM monitors the OSM bus connected to it at ports 7 and 8 in both directions.
If it detects a break on the bus, it interconnects the ends of the bus to reestablish a
functioning bus configuration. A maximum of 50 OSMs are permitted in an optical
ring. This strategy achieves a reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 seconds.
The RM mode is activated on the OSM using a DIP switch.
11
1
1
1 Fiber-optic cable (FO)
1
OSM in RM mode
1
1
OSM ITP62 OSM TP62 OSM TP62 OSM TP62
OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62OSM ITP53
OSM ITP62OSM ITP62
11
Figure 6-9 Redundant Ring Structure with OSMs
Active Components and Topologies
6-18 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Redundant Ring Structure with ESMs
A redundant electrical ring can be established using ESMs in the same way. To
achieve this the ESMs are connected together using ports 7 and 8. One device
must be switched to the redundancy manager mode. With ESMs and a maximum
of 50 devices in the ring, a reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can also be
achieved.
ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80ESM ITP 80ESM ITP 80
ESM ITP 80ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80
ESM ITP 80
22
2
2
2 ITP XP standard cable 9/9
2
ESM in RM mode
2
2
ESM ITP 80
22
Figure 6-10 Redundant Ring Structure with ESMs
Note
The reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can only be achieved when no
components (for example switches from other vendors) other than OSMs or ESMs
are used in the redundant ring.
In a ring, one device and one device only must operate in the redundancy
manager mode.
DTEs or complete network segments can be attached to ports 1 -- 6 of an
OSM/ESM operating in the RM mode.
Active Components and Topologies
6-19
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.2.6 Linking Subnets Using the OSM/ESM
Subnets
Using the OSM/ESM, it is possible to link several different Ethernet networks
together. The collision domain of a subnet ends at the port of the OSM/ESM.
OSMs/ESMs are ideal for structuring larger networks. Large networks are first
divided into smaller units (subnets). These subnets are then connected to the
OSM/ESM that not only interconnects them but also separates them in terms of
load. The time and effort required for network configuration and expansion is
considerably reduced.
Network Expansion
Selectively forwarding data to the addressed nodes contains the load in the
subnets/segments. Discarding bad data also brings about a further improvement in
network performance.
These properties make the OSM/ESM the ideal tool for expanding conventional
Ethernet networks that have otherwise reached their limits.
OLM OLMOLM
ELM ELM
1 ITP standard cable 9/15
2 ITP XP standard cable 9/9
2
2
2
1
3 Fiber-optic cable (FO)
3
4
4
5
4 727-1 drop cable
5 Triaxial cable
ELM ELM
4
4
5
ESM ITP 80
Figure 6-11 Linking Several Collision Domains/Subnets Using an ESM
Active Components and Topologies
6-20 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.2.7 Redundant Linking of Subnets Using the OSM/ESM
Structure of a Redundant Link
Using an OSM/ESM, fast, redundant links between two Ethernet subnets or
networks can be implemented. These networks can, for example, consist of
redundant OSM/ESM rings.
The redundant link as shown in Figure 6-12 is established on separate paths via
the two TP ports (port 1) of an OSM/ESM pair. The standby-sync ports of both
OSMs/ESMs must be connected using an ITP XP standard cable 9/9 with a
maximum length of 40 m.
1. ITP XP standard cable 9/9
OLM OLM OLM
1
1
2
2
2. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
Redundant paths
OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62
Synchronization cable
222
222
1
Standby master Standby slave
Figure 6-12 Redundant Link Between Two Networks or Network Segments
Active Components and Topologies
6-21
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
How Standby Redundancy Works
One of the two OSMs/ESMs must be set to the standby mode by setting the DIP
switch. This OSM/ESM forms the redundant link that only transfers data when the
other path (main link) fails. The OSM/ESM in the standby mode receives
information about the state of the main link via the synchronization connection
between the standby-sync ports. If the main link fails, the redundant OSM/ESM
activates the standby link within 0.3 seconds.
If the problem is eliminated on the main link, this also causes a signal on the
synchronization connection. The main link is enabled again and the standby link
disabled.
Faults Managed by the Redundancy Function
The following problems on the main link activate the standby link:
SMain OSM/ESM without power
SCable break at a cascaded port of the main OSM/ESM
SDefective or deactivated partner on a cascaded port of the main OSM/SM.
6.2.8 Components of the OSM/ESM
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM including
STerminal block for the power supply
SFittings for wall mounting
SProduct information bulletin
SCD with Operating Instructions and “Network Management” Manual
Order number
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OSM See catalog IK PI
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet ESM See catalog IK PI
Accessories
SIMATIC NET ITP Standard Cable
SIMATIC NET ITP XP Standard Cable
SIMATIC NET FIBER OPTIC Glass FOC
SIMATIC NET TP Cord
SIMATIC NET FC Outlet RJ-45
SIMATIC NET FC TP Cables
For ordering data, refer to catalog IK PI.
Active Components and Topologies
6-22 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
!Warning
The Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM is designed for operation with safety extra-low
voltage (SELV). This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying
with IEC 950/EN 60950/VDE 0805 may be connected to the power supply
terminals or the signaling contact.
For more detailed information on the OSM/ESM, refer to the “Industrial Ethernet
OSM/ESM” operating instructions in the appendix of this manual.
6.2.9 Network Management of the OSM/ESM
Functions
Network management provides the following functions:
Password protected login for administrators (write and read rights) and users (read
rights only)
SReading out version and status information
SSetting the message and standby mask and address information
SFixed parameter settings for ports and filter tables
SOutput of statistical information
SDiagnostics of data traffic via a selectable mirror port
SDownloading new firmware versions via the network
If problems occur in the network, the OSM/ESM can send error messages (traps)
automatically to a network management system or E-mails to a network
administrator.
Remote Monitoring
Remote monitoring (RMON) provides the following functions:
The OSM/ESM is capable of visualizing statistical information according to the
RMON Standards 1 to 3. These include, for example, error statistics maintained for
each port separately.
Active Components and Topologies
6-23
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Web-Based Management Functions
The management level of the OSM is accessible using a Web browser. Masks,
filters, and ports can be configured. Diagnostics of the device and the ports is
possible via the Web.
Figure 6-13 Network Management with Web Browser
Active Components and Topologies
6-24 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.3 ASGE Active Star Coupler
Figure 6-14 Star Coupler ASGE
ECFL2 ECFL4 ECTP3 KYDE ECAUI HSSM2 MIKEUYDE
Figure 6-15 Interface Cards for the Star Coupler ASGE
The active star couplers form the branching points on a 10 Mbps network using the
CSMA/CD access protocol complying with IEEE 802.3. The modular concept
allows a flexible network structure with various transmission media such as triaxial
cable (727-0 bus cable), Industrial Twisted Pair cable, fiber-optic cable (FO) or
drop cables (727-1).
The star coupler has the following properties and functions:
SStrong construction with die-cast aluminum housing
SCan be used as a desktop unit or in a 19” cabinet
SInterface cards available for various transmission media and
applications
SEasy servicing by replacing interface cards during operation
SMonitoring with HSSM 2 signaling card
SSNMP management capability with MIKE management card
SAlso available as 24 V version
SRedundancy concepts possible with ring topology using fiber-optic cable
Active Components and Topologies
6-25
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Note
For more detailed information about the ASGE star coupler, refer to the SIMATIC
NET Catalog IK PI and the Ethernet manual (English, order number: HIR:
943320-011, German, order number: HIR: 943320-001).
Active Components and Topologies
6-26 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.4 MINI OTDE Optical Transceiver
6.4.1 Overview
Figure 6-16 MINI OTDE Optical Transceiver
Areas of Application
The MINI OTDE optical transceiver is used to connect a DTE with an AUI port to
an optical network and to establish a fiber-optic link between two DTEs. The MINI
OTDE provides electrical isolation with the fiber-optic cable (FO). This results in
immunity to electromagnetic interference. The optical transceiver can be plugged
directly into the AUI port of the DTE. If the module is fixed using the wall mounting,
the MINI OTDE can be connected to the DTE using the 727-1 drop cable. The
major advantages of the MINI OTDE optical transceiver are its small dimensions
and compact design.
The optical port of the MINI OTDE is implemented as two BFOC/2.5 female
connectors (ST compatible). A glass fiber-optic cable with graded fibers (Type
62.5/125 µm fibers) can be connected.
Note
Removing and reinserting the MINI OTDE with the power supply turned on can
lead to disturbances on the DTE (for example restarting a PC).
Note
For more detailed information on the MINI OTDE optical transceiver, refer to the
SIMATIC NET Catalog IK PI and the Ethernet manual (English, order number:
HIR: 943320-011, German, order number: HIR: 943320-001).
Active Components and Topologies
6-27
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.4.2 The Product and Ordering Data
The MINI OTDE optical transceiver is supplied in the BFOC version:
Order number
MINI OTDE optical transceiver HIR: 943303-021
Accessories
Order number
Wall holder for Mini OTDE and Mini UTDE HIR: 943426-001
(five mountings per package)
6.4.3 Functions
The MINI OTDE optical transceiver has the following properties and functions:
SThe optical transceiver converts the electrical signals of a node with an AUI port
(complying with IEEE 802.3) into the optical form required for the fiber-optic
cable.
SThe optical port complies with the specification IEEE 802.3; 10BASE F /4/ and
operates at a wavelength of 860 nm.
SIt allows the attachment of DTEs, fan-out units, repeaters, and ELMs to an
optical transmission path and connects two DTEs via fiber-optic cable.
SAn optical link segment can be created using an optical transceiver and
fiber-optic cable.
SIt is also possible to connect the MINI OTDE to a DTE using the 727-1 drop
cable.
6.4.4 Topologies with the MINI OTDE
Two applications of the MINI OTDE are illustrated below:
SPoint-to-point link between two DTEs on a fiber-optic cable
SAttachment of subnets and DTEs to an optical network
Point-to-Point Link with Fiber-Optic Cable
Figure 6-17 Point-to-Point Link
Active Components and Topologies
6-28 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Attachment of Subnets and DTEs to an Optical Network
ELM
1. TP cord 9/RJ-45
2. ITP XP standard cable 9/9
1
1
2
3
3. Fiber-optic cable (FO)
Figure 6-18 Attachment of Subnets and DTEs
Active Components and Topologies
6-29
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.5 Mini UTDE Electrical Transceiver (RJ-45)
6.5.1 Overview
Figure 6-19 Mini UTDE Electrical Transceiver (RJ-45)
Areas of Application
The twisted pair MINI UTDE RJ-45 transceiver is used to connect a DTE with an
AUI port to a twisted pair network and to establish a twisted pair link between two
DTEs with AUI ports.
The Mini UTDE RJ-45 can be plugged directly into the AUI port of the DTE.
Fixed installation with a wall holder is also possible. The Mini UTDE RJ-45 is then
connected to a DTE using the 727-1 drop cable.
Note
Removing and reinserting the MINI UTDE with the power supply turned on can
lead to disturbances on the DTE (for example restart on a PC).
Note
For more detailed information on the MINI UTDE electrical transceiver, refer to the
SIMATIC NET Catalog IK PI and the Ethernet manual (English, order number:
HIR: 943320-011, German, order number: HIR: 943320-001).
Active Components and Topologies
6-30 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.5.2 The Product and Ordering Data
Ordering Data:
The electrical transceiver Mini UTDE RJ-45 Industrial Ethernet Twisted Pair
Transceiver can be ordered as follows:
Order number
Electrical Transceiver Mini UTDE RJ-45 HIR:943 270-002
Wall holder (accessories) HIR:943 426-001
for Mini UTDE and OTDE (pack of 5)
6.5.3 Functions
The twisted-pair Mini UTDE RJ-45 transceiver has the following features and
functions:
SSpecification complying with IEEE 802.3, 10BASE-T /3/.
SIt allows the attachment of DTEs with an AUI port, repeaters or ELMs to a
twisted-pair transmission path and connects two DTEs via twisted pair.
SThe twisted pair transceiver converts the electrical signals of a node with an
AUI port complying with IEEE 802.3 into the electrical signals of a twisted-pair
port.
SIt is also possible to connect the Mini UTDE RJ-45 to a DTE
using the 727-1 drop cable.
Active Components and Topologies
6-31
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
6.5.4 Topologies with the Mini UTDE RJ-45
Figure 6-20 shows the linking of a node with an AUI port to a twisted pair network
as an example of the twisted pair transceiver
Mini UTDE RJ-45.
TP Cord
RJ-45/RJ-45
FC TP Standard Cable
FC Outlet RJ-45
ESM TP 80
PC with CP 1613
S7-300 with CP 343-1
TP Cord
RJ-45/RJ-4
5
TP Cord
RJ-45/15
Node with AUI port
727-1 drop cable
(optional)
Mini UTDE
RJ-45
Figure 6-20 Example of a Link with the Mini UTDE RJ-45
Active Components and Topologies
6-32 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Guidelines for Installing Networked
Automation Systems in Buildings
Chapter Overview
7.1 General Instructions on Networking with Bus Cables 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Protection from Electric Shock 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility of Bus Cables 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Measures to Counter Interference Voltages 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Equipotential Bonding System 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Requirements of the Alternating Power Distribution System 7-9. . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4 Shielding Devices and Cables 7-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5 Special Noise Suppression Measures 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Positioning of Devices and Cable Routing 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Influence of the Current Distribution System (EN 50174-2, 6.4.4.2) 7-18. . . . .
7.4.2 Cable Categories and Clearances 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Cabling within Closets 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 Cabling within Buildings 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5 Cabling outside Buildings 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Mechanical Protection of Bus Cables 7-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility of Fiber-Optic Cables 7-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Installing LAN Cables 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.1 Instructions for Installing Electrical and Optical LAN cables 7-26. . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8 Additional Instructions on Installing Fiber-Optic Cables 7-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9 Fitting Twisted Pair Connectors 7-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 Installing and Wiring up the FC Outlet RJ-45 7-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11 Connecting Fiber-Optic Cables 7-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.1 General Instructions on Networking with Bus Cables
Bus (LAN) Cables in Plants
Bus cables are important connections for communication between individual
components of an automation system. Mechanical damage or repeated electrical
interference affecting these bus connections reduces the transmission capacity of
the system. In extreme cases, such problems can lead to failure of the entire
automation system. This section explains how to protect cables from mechanical
and electrical impairment.
Shielding and Grounding Concept
Bus cables connect programmable controllers. These in turn are connected to
transducers, power supply units, peripheral devices etc. over cables.
All the components together form a complex electrically networked automation
system.
When connecting system components via electrical cables (in this case bus
cables), remember to take into account the requirements of the overall system
structure.
Connecting cables, in particular, influence the shielding and grounding concept.
Shielding and grounding an electrical installation serves the following purposes:
SProtects both humans and animals from dangerous network voltages
SPrevents unacceptable noise emission and susceptibility to noise
SProtects the system from overvoltage (for example lightning protection)
Networking SIMATIC with SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC NET network components and SIMATIC automation components are
designed to operate together taking into account the aspects listed above. By
keeping to the installation instructions described in the system manuals, your
automation system will meet the legal and normal industrial requirements for safety
and noise immunity.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.2 Protection from Electric Shock
Twisted-Pair Signal Level
The signal levels on twisted pair cables are low voltage. Correctly installed and
operated twisted pair bus cables do not have dangerous electrical voltages.
Nevertheless you should remember the following rules when installing the power
supply for all components (DTEs, bus components, etc.) that you want to connect
to twisted-pair cable.
Operation with 24 V DC
Numerous SIMATIC NET components require a voltage of 24 V DC as their
operating voltage or as auxiliary contact voltage. This power supply must meet the
requirements of an extra-low voltage with reliable electrical isolation from the main
power system, complying with IEC 60950 or EN 60950 /18/.
Operation with Live Voltage
Components operated with live voltage must meet the requirements for protection
against electric shock as stipulated in EN 60950 /18/, EN 61131-2 /20/, EN 61010
/19/ or other applicable product standards.
All the signals of the twisted-pair port must meet the requirements of reliable
electrical isolation from the main power supply, complying with IEC 60950 or EN
60950 /18/.
Cabling Components
Conductive cable path systems, barriers, and accessories must be included in the
protective measures preventing indirect contact (protection against illegal
dangerous contact voltage).
Grounding conductors (PE) and equipotential bonding conductors must be installed
according to the requirements of systems in buildings complying with HD 384.4.41
(protective measures against electric shock) and HD 384.5.54 (grounding and
grounding conductor). The application of EN 50174-2 is recommended for the
separation of low voltage cabling and IT cabling.
The requirements of HD 384.4.47 S2 (application of measures for protection
against electric shock) and HD 384.4.482 S1 (selection of protective measures as
a function of external influences) and appropriate national or local regulations must
be adhered to.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Safe Initial State of the System in Case of Faults
Problems on communication connections must not be allowed to put system users
at risk. Cable or wire breaks must not lead to undefined statuses in the plant or
system.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility of Bus Cables
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the capability of an electrical installation to
function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without influencing this
environment and interfering with other installations and equipment belonging to it
(in compliance with DIN VDE 0870).
This mutual influence can take the form of electrical, magnetic, and
electromagnetic effects. These effects can spread both over cable connections (for
example a common power supply) or due to radiated interference.
To avoid external interference affecting electrical systems, these effects must be
reduced to a certain level. The measures involved include the design, structure,
and correct connection of bus cables. The components and bus cables for
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet meet the requirements of the European
standards for devices used in an industrial environment. This is documented by the
CE marking.
Note
Adherence to the specified limit values can only be guaranteed when using
components from the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet range exclusively and by
keeping to the installation instructions in this manual!
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.3.1 Measures to Counter Interference Voltages
Overview
Measures are often taken to suppress interference voltages when the control
system is already in operation and problems occur receiving signals. You can
normally reduce the investment necessary for later restructuring of the system by
remembering the following points when installing your automation system.
SSetup an equipotential bonding system including all inactive metal parts
SInclude a power distribution system with non-current PE grounding conductor
(for example using the TN-S system)
SInclude shielding devices and bus cables
SPosition devices and route cables suitably
STake special noise suppression measures
The list shows that installing an interference-free networked automation system
simply with the tools for bus cable installation is not adequate. Measures must
already be taken during the planning phase of a system or building to ensure
harmony between all the equipment that requires electrically conductive
connections. Such measures include metallic structures in the building, conduits
for supply installations (gas, water, ventilation), as well as the electrical power
supply.
Standards for the Installation of Noise-Free Information Technology Systems
Based on the points outlined above, the standards committees of the European
Union formulated European standards for satisfactory installation and satisfactory
operation of information technology cabling within the infrastructure of a building in
which a power distribution system is operated at an effective value less than AC
1000 V (EN 50174).
The term “information technology” cabling/system includes all devices and cables
that transmit or process information electronically. The resulting standards can
therefore also be applied to automation systems.
Adherence to the standards when installing communication cabling (EN 50174,
/12/, /13/, /14/ series) and the requirements for bonding (EN 50310, /21/) is
strongly recommended. There are currently no international standards to compare
with these European standards in terms of detail.
The standards for the design of communications cabling (EN 50098, EN 50173,
/11/ series) are intended for applications in an office environment but nevertheless
include useful information for industrial applications.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.3.2 Equipotential Bonding System
Aims of Bonding
The noise immunity of extended electronic automation systems or, in general,
information technology systems largely depends on the suitable design of the
grounding and bonding system of the building.
Equipotential bonding and grounding have two essential aims:
SProtection from the dangers of electricity
–by limiting the contact voltage and creating a fault to ground path
SImprovement of electromagnetic compatibility
– by creating a reference potential and equalizing potential differences
between parts of the system
–by shielding
Causes of Potential Differences
Wherever electric currents flow, magnetic fields are produced that in turn induce
stray currents in electrically conductive materials. Induced stray currents can
therefore not be avoided in the vicinity of electrical consumers (drives, electronic
controls, lighting etc.) and their power supply cables. They spread in all conductor
loops. Conductor loops are formed by parts of buildings such as metal bannisters
on staircases, water pipes or central heating pipes as well as through the shields of
electrical data cables and the protective ground connectors of electrical devices
(PE). The flow of current produces a voltage drop. This can be measured as a
potential difference between two locations within the system.
Extremely high potential differences between two grounding points result from
lightning strikes.
Effects of Potential Differences in Information Technology Systems
If locations with different grounding potential are connected via cables, currents will
flow. The currents flow on all connections between these two points, for example
also on the signal cables or cable shields connecting them. Attached devices can
be disturbed or even destroyed.
The aim of a grounding and bonding system is to ensure that the currents flow in
the grounding system and not in the electronic circuits.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Measures for Grounding and Equipotential Bonding
According to EN 50310 /21/, a “common bonding network CBN” with a fine mesh
of conductive elements must be created in buildings with information technology
systems. Systems that extend beyond one floor and that are interconnected by
electrical bus cables require a three-dimensional CBN with a lattice construction
resembling a Faraday cage.
With the following measures, you can create a grounding and bonding system that
will improve EMC:
SInclude all the metal parts of a building in a common bonding network (CBN)
with low impedance and high current carrying capacity. To this network, you
should then connect the main grounding terminal or bar, grounding conductors,
metal conduits, reinforcing rods, equipotential bonding ring conductor, cable
racks and any additional bonding conductors.
SConnect all inactive metal parts in the immediate vicinity of your automation
components and bus cables to the bonding system ensuring good conductivity.
This includes all metal parts of cabinets, machine parts etc. that have no
electrical function in the automation system.
SInclude metal, conducting cable channels/racks in the equipotential bonding of
the building and between the individual parts of the system. The individual
segments of the channels/racks must be connected together with low
inductance and low resistance and connected to the CBN system as often as
possible. Expansion joints and angled connections should be bridged by
additional flexible grounding bands. The connections between the individual
segments of channels must be protected from corrosion to ensure long-term
stability.
SThe effectiveness of equipotential bonding is greater when the impedance of
the bonding conductor is low.
SThe impedance of the additional bonding conductor must not exceed 10% of
the shield impedance of parallel Industrial Twisted Pair cables.
SProtect the bonding conductor from corrosion.
SInstall the bonding conductor so that the area enclosed by the bonding
conductor and signal cables is as small as possible.
SUse copper or galvanized steel for the bonding conductor.
For information about grounding and bonding techniques, refer to the system
manuals of the SIMATIC S7-300 /9/, S7-400 /10/ programmable controllers.
Note
Equipotential bonding is unnecessary if the sections of a system are connected
exclusively using fiber-optic cable (FO).
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.3.3 Requirements of the Power Distribution System
General
HD 384.3 S2 (IEC 60364-3:1993, modified, /22/) describes various power
distribution systems (TN-S, TN-C,S, TN-C, TT and IT systems). Additional national
or local regulations stipulate the measures required for protection from electric
shock and stipulate the requirements for a grounding system (see also section 7.2
protection from electric shock).
The outer surfaces of switching cubicles, device casings, connectors and bus
cables are conductive to provide shielding and must be connected to the grounding
system to ensure safety. To ensure that the EMC shield effect is achieved, they
make further requirements of the grounding system and grounding of the power
distribution system. These result in an alternating power distribution system with
non-current carrying grounding conductors, for example as in the TN-S system.
Cable shields are part of the equipotential bonding network of a system.
Since the shields of twisted-pair cables are included in the bonding system, all the
currents coupled into the bonding system of a building or plant flow through them.
Depending on the intensity and frequency range, these shield currents can cause
disturbances in data communication. Measures must therefore be taken to avoid
the alternating power distribution system of a plant including the bonding system in
the power return cabling. A TN–S system with separate cables or N and PE, for
example, meets these requirements. The EN 50310:2000 /21/ standard provides
detailed guidelines for installing a network system for supplying information
technology equipment.
Note
DTEs and /or network components connected over shielded twisted-pair cables
must only be supplied by alternating power distribution systems whose grounding
conductors cannot contribute to the transmission of energy. There must be no
PEN cable within the entire system. This condition is met, for example, by a TN-S
system.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Signal Connections in Existing Installations
If unexplained, sporadic disturbances occur in data processing systems or on their
communication connections, it is advisable to check for unwanted shield currents.
These can be measured simply by inserting the cable in question in a clip-on
ammeter. Currents higher than approximately 0.1 A indicate problems in the
electrical installation, for example in the TN-C system.
If the alternating current power system supplies a large number of electronic
devices or electronically controlled consumers the highest interference currents
can generally be observed at the third harmonic of the frequency.
Other signs of an unsuitable alternating current power supply are as follows:
SCurrents on the PE conductor
SCurrents through water pipes and heating pipes
SProgressive corrosion at grounding terminals, on lightning conductors, and
water pipes.
Remember that sporadic events such as switching, short circuits, or atmospheric
discharge (lightning strike) can cause current peaks in the system many times
higher than the average value.
Troubleshooting
The following measures are suitable for trouble shooting:
SRestructuring the power distribution system (to form a TN-S system)
SReplacing the electrical data cabling with fiber-optic cables
SInstalling an equipotential bonding conductor parallel to the disturbed data
cabling.
Note
If shield currents on bus cables cause problems in communication, the safest
often cheapest solution is to replace the disturbed electrical bus connection with a
fiber-optic cable.
Help with structuring noise-free power supply systems
You will find the addresses of Siemens departments that will help you in the
planning and installation of noise-free power supply installations for
information-technology systems or in the detection and elimination of existing
installation errors in the appendix of this manual.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-11
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Example of Installing FOC in a TN-C-S System
Figure 7-1 illustrates the relationships between the structure of the alternating
current network, equipotential bonding system, and information technology cabling
in a building.
Three PCs and three S7-300 PLCs represent the information technology system.
These are networked using two OSMs. The casing of all the DTEs and the OSMs
are correctly connected to the grounding and bonding system of the building. The
PCs are connected to the system via the PE contact of their power supply cable.
The casing of the OSMs and the racks of the S7-300 PLCs are connected either
directly or via a switching cubicle casing locally to the CBN. The shields of the
twisted-pair cables interconnect all the device casings and are therefore connected
to the grounding and bonding systems at both ends.
The horizontal power distribution within a floor corresponds to the requirements of
a TN-S system. The neutral cable N and grounding conductor PE are separate
cables. The PE grounding conductor does not contribute to the power supply of the
devices. The parallel cable shields of the twisted-pair cables are therefore also free
of neutral cable currents.
The vertical, inter-floor parallel distribution is designed as a TN-C system (common
PEN cable for N and PE). The PEN is the return cable of the power supply of all
connected consumers. A connection between the two OSMs at the bottom
right-hand edge of the picture over shielded twisted-pair cables would allow the
return cable current of the PEN to flow through the entire bonding system, all PE
cables, and all cable shields on both floors. It is therefore strongly recommended to
implement the inter-floor connection between the two OSMs with fiber-optic cables.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-12 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
PE
N
L
PENL3L2L1
CBN
OSM ITP62
PE
N
L
CBN
OSM ITP62
FOC
Floor 1
TN-S
Floor 2
TN-S
neutral cable current
TN-C
Figure 7-1 Fiber-Optic Cables Avoid Shield Currents in the TN-C-S network
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-13
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.3.4 Shielding Devices and Cables
Shielding Cables
The high degree of noise immunity of SIMATIC NET twisted pair copper networks
is achieved by the exclusive use of shielded twisted-pair cables. The highly
symmetrical twisted signal wires are surrounded by a combination of foil and
braided mesh shields. The shield makes large-area, conductive contact with the
casing of the attached DTE or network component at both ends of the twisted-pair
cable via the connector/outlet. The entire communications electronics, consisting of
transmitter and receiver chips as well as the signal cables is protected from
electromagnetic influence from the outside world by a closed “cocoon” of
electrically conductive device casing and cable shield.
Note
The values specified for noise emission and noise immunity in the technical
specifications of all SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet components assumes the
use of shielded twisted-pair cables.
As explained in the installation rules for the devices, the shields of the twisted-pair
cables must make good conductive contact with the device casing at both ends.
This is ensured by the SIMATIC NET connectors designed specially to match the
devices.
If, on the other hand, the rules are ignored and unshielded cables are used or the
shields do not make contact with the casing at both ends, there is no longer any
guarantee that the technical data regarding noise emission and noise immunity will
be adhered to. In this case, the operators of the system must take responsibility
themselves for compliance with the legal limit values for noise emission and noise
immunity (CE mark)!
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-14 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Handling Bus Cable Shields
Note the following points about cable shields:
SUse SIMATIC NET twisted-pair cables throughout your system. The shields of
these cables have an adequate density to meet the legal requirements
regarding noise emission and immunity.
SAlways contact the shields of bus cables at both ends. The legal requirements
for noise emission and noise immunity in your system (CE marking) can only be
achieved when the shields make contact at both ends.
SSecure the shield of the bus cable to the connector casing.
SIf cables are installed permanently, it is advisable to remove the insulation of the
shielded cable and to establish contact on the shield/PE conductor bar.
Note
If there is a potential difference between the grounding points, an illegally high
compensating current can flow through the shield grounded at both ends. To
rectify the problem, do not, under any circumstances, open the shield of the bus
cable.
This problem can be solved in the following ways:
SInstall an additional bonding conductor parallel to the bus cable that takes over
the shield current (for notes on equipotential bonding refer to Section 7.3.2)
SUse fiber-optic cable instead of electrical cable (safest solution).
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-15
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Establishing Shield Contact
When contacting the cable shields, please note the following points:
SSecure the braided shield with metal cable clamps.
SThe clamps must make good and large-area contact with the shield (see Figure
7-2).
SContact SIMATIC NET twisted-pair cables only using the braided copper shield
and not the aluminum foil shield. The foil shield is connected to a plastic foil to
increase tearing strength and is therefore non-conductive.
SContact the shield with the shielding bar directly at the point at which the cable
enters the cabinet.
Figure 7-2 Securing Shielded Cables with Cable Clamps and Ties (schematic representation).
SWhen removing the sheath of the cable, make sure that the braid shield of the
cables is not damaged.
STo allow good contact between grounding elements, tin-plated or galvanically
stabilized surfaces are ideal. With galvanized surfaces, the necessary contact
should be achieved using suitable screws. Painted surfaces should be avoided
at the contact points.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-16 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
SUnless specifically intended for this purpose, shield clamps and contacts should
not be used for strain relief. The contact with the shielding bar could be
impaired or be broken altogether.
Figure 7-3 Contacting the Shield at the Point of Entry to a Closet
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-17
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.3.5 Special Noise Suppression Measures
Connecting Switched Inductances to Suppressors
Some inductive switching devices (for example relays) create interference voltages
that are a multiple of the switched operating voltage. The distributed SIMATIC
S7-300 /9/ and S7-400 /10/ system manuals contain suggestions about how to limit
the interference voltages caused by inductance by connecting them to
suppressors.
Power Supply for Programming Devices
It is advisable to include a power socket for programming devices in each cabinet.
The socket must be supplied by the same system to which the PE conductor for
the cabinet is connected.
Cabinet Lighting
Use bulbs for the cabinet lighting, for example LINESTRAR lamps. Avoid the use
of fluorescent lamps since they cause interference. If you need to use fluorescent
lamps, take the measures shown in Figure 7-4.
Wire-mesh screen over the lamp
Shielded cable
Metal-encased switch
Power supply filter or shielded
power cable
Figure 7-4 Measures for Interference Suppression of Fluorescent Lamps in a Cabinet
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-18 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.4 Arrangement of Devices and Cables
Adequate Clearance to Reduce the Effects of Interference
One simple but nevertheless effective method of reducing the effects of
interference is to keep the “culprit” and “victim” devices and cables as far apart
from each other as possible. Inductive and capacative interference injection
declines in proportion to the square of the distance of the elements involved. This
means that doubling the clearance reduces the effects of interference by a factor
of four. Taking certain aspects into account during the planning phase of a building
generally incurs little extra cost and can save considerable effort later.
Standards Recommending the Spatial Arrangement of Devices and Cables
EN 50174-2 /13/ includes recommendations on the spatial arrangement of devices
and cables with the aim of achieving the lowest possible mutual interference.
7.4.1 The Influence of Power Distribution Systems (EN 50174-2,
6.4.4.2)
Planning the Electrical Installations
To avoid the power distribution system affecting sensitive devices, the following
points must be taken into account when planning the electrical installation:
SPossible sources of interference, for example voltage distributors, voltage
transformers, elevators, high currents in power supply bars, must be located at
a suitable distance from sensitive devices:
SMetal pipes (for example for water, gas, heating) and cables should enter the
building at the same point;
SThe metal surfaces, shields, metal pipes, and connections of such conduits
must be connected with low-resistance conductors to the main bonding
conductor of the building.
SUsing a common cable route for low-voltage cable and signal cables with
adequate separation (either by clearance or shielding) between the two to avoid
large induction loops that are created by the different low-voltage cabling.
SThe use of either a single multi-core cable for all power supplies or (in the case
of higher power requirements) of conductor bars with weak magnetic fields.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-19
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.4.2 Cable Categories and Clearances
Fiber-Optic Cables
When using fiber-optic cables, mechanical protection is necessary, however the
EMC rules do not apply.
Cable Groups
It is useful to group wires and cables into various categories according to the
signals they carry, possible interference signals, and their sensitivity to
interference. Minimum clearances can be specified for these categories so that
interference-free operation can be expected under normal operating conditions if
the clearance is adhered to.
Conditions
Grouping cables according to voltage classes assumes that the interference
voltages relate directly to the power supply voltage conducted (the lower the
supply voltage, the lower the interference voltage). Remember, however, that DC
or 50 Hz power supply voltages do not represent any danger to Industrial Ethernet
bus cables. The critical interference voltages in the kHz to MHz frequency range
are created by the “consumer” connected to the cable. A 24 V DC cable with which
a relay is switched regularly has a far more critical interference range than a 230 V
cable supplying a light-bulb.
In the information shown below, it is assumed that all the components within an
automation system and all the plant components controlled by the system (for
example machines, robots etc.) at least meet the requirements of the European
standards for electromagnetic compatibility in an industrial environment. If devices
are defective or incorrectly installed, higher interference voltages must be
expected!
The following is assumed:
SThe cables for analog signals, data signals and process signals are always
shielded.
SThe distance from the cables to the chassis surface of the system (cabinet wall,
grounded and conducting cable channel, ...) is not more than 10 cm.
Note
In general, the greater the distance between cables and the shorter the distances
over which the cables run parallel to each other, the less the danger of
interference.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-20 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
How to Read the Table
To check how cables of different types must be laid, follow the steps outlined
below:
1. Find the cable type of the first cable in column 1 (cables for ...).
2. Find the cable type of the second cable in the relevant section in column 2 (and
cables for ...).
3. Read the guidelines for laying the cables in column 3 (lay ...).
Table 7-1 Cabling Within Buildings
Cables for ... and cables for ... lay ...
Bus signals, shielded
(PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet)
Bus signals, unshielded
(AS-Interface)
Bus signals, shielded
(PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet)
Bus signals, unshielded
(AS-Interface)
Data signal, shielded
(PG, OP, printer, counter inputs
etc.)
Analog signals, shielded
DC voltage
(v 60 V), unshielded
Process signals
(v 25 V), shielded
AC voltage
(v 25 V), unshielded
Monitors (coaxial cable)
In common bundles or cable
channels
DC voltage
(u 60 V and v 400 V),
unshielded
AC voltage
(u 25 V and v 400 V),
unshielded
In separate bundles or cable
channels (no minimum clearance
required)
DC and AC voltage
(u 400 V), unshielded Within closets:
In separate bundles or cable
channels (no minimum clearance
required)
Outside closets:
On separate cable paths with at
least 10 cm clearance
HF cables for transmitter high
level stages and transmitter
antennas with voltages from 10
to 1000 V
Lay HF cables in steel pipes with
multiple ground points; at least
30 cm clearance
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-21
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.4.3 Cabling within Closets
When running cables within cubicles and cabinets, remember the following rules:
SInstall the cables in metallic, electrically conductive cable channels.
SScrew the cable channels to the struts of the rack or cubicle walls
approximately every 50 cm making low-resistance and low-inductance contact.
SSeparate the cables according to the categories as shown in table 7-1 .
SMaintain the minimum clearance between the cables of different categories as
explained in table 7-1 . In general, the risk of interference due to crosstalk is
less the greater the clearance between the cables.
SWhere cables of different categories cross, they should cross approximately at
right angles (wherever possible avoid sections where the cables run parallel).
SThe shields of all cables entering the wiring closet should make large-area
contact with closet ground as close as possible to the point of entry.
7.4.4 Cabling within Buildings
When laying cables outside cabinets but within buildings, note the following points:
SLay the cables in metallic, electrically conducting cable channels.
SInclude the metal cable channels and racks in the bonding system of the
building or plant. Note the information on equipotential bonding in Section 7.3 in
this manual.
SSeparate the cables according to the categories as described in table 7-1 and
run the various categories in their own channels/racks.
SIf there is only one common metal channel available for all categories, either the
clearances shown in Table 7-1 must be maintained or the individual categories
should be separated from each other by metallic partitions. The partitions must
be connected to the channel making low-resistance and low-inductance
contact.
SCable racks should cross each other at right angles.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-22 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.4.5 Cabling outside Buildings
Using Fiber-Optic Cables
Industrial Twisted Pair is intended for use within buildings (tertiary area). The
installation of Industrial Twisted Pair cables between buildings in not permitted.
LAN connections between buildings and between buildings and external facilities
are only possible with fiber-optic cables (FO). Due to the optical transmission
principle, fiber-optic cables are not affected by electromagnetic interference.
Measures for equipotential bonding and overvoltage protection are unnecessary
with fiber-optic cables.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-23
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.5 Mechanical Protection of Bus Cables
Protection of Electrical and Optical Bus Cables
Mechanical protection is required to protect bus cables from breaks or mechanical
damage.
Note
The guidelines for mechanical protection apply both to electrical and optical
cables.
Measures for Mechanical Protection
The following measures are recommended to protect bus cables from physical
damage:
SWhen cable cannot be installed on a cable rack or similar construction, it should
be installed in a conduit (for example PG 11-16).
SIn areas where the cable is subject to mechanical stress, install the cable in a
heavy-gauge aluminum conduit or in a heavy-gauge plastic conduit (see Figure
7-5)
SWhen 90° bends are necessary and at the junctions between buildings (for
example expansion joints), a break in the conduit is acceptable only when there
is no likelihood of damage to the cable, for example due to falling objects (see
Figure 7-6).
SIn areas where the cable is likely to be walked on or driven over, the cable must
be protected from damage by a closed heavy-gauge aluminum or steel conduit.
As an alternative, the cable can be laid in a metal cable gutter.
Figure 7-5 Mechanical Protection of the Bus Cable
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-24 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Figure 7-6 Interrupting the Conduit at an Expansion Joint
Redundant Bus Cables
The installation of redundant bus cables involves special requirements. Redundant
cables should always be installed on separate cable racks to avoid simultaneous
damage by the same event.
Install Bus Cables Separately
To prevent accidental damage to bus cables, they should be clearly visible and
should be separate from all other wiring and cables. To improve EMC, it is often
advisable to install the bus cables in a separate cable channel or in conductive,
metal tubes. Such measures also make it easier to localize a faulty cable.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-25
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility of Fiber-Optic Cables
Fiber-Optic Cables
For communications between buildings and/or external facilities, the use of
fiber-optic cables is generally recommended. Due to the optical transmission
principle, fiber-optic cables are not affected by electromagnetic interference.
Measures for equipotential bonding and for overvoltage protection are unnecessary
with fiber-optic cables.
Note
Fiber-optic cables are ideally suited for LAN connections in areas with high EMI
levels. Remember, however, that bus components operating on an electrical basis
such as OLMs, OSMs/ORMs etc. may require additional noise protection
measures if they are being operated in such areas. These must be protected using
the measures already mentioned such as shielding, grounding, minimum
clearance to sources of interference etc.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-26 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.7 Installing LAN Cables
7.7.1 Instructions for Installing Electrical and Optical LAN Cables
General
During installation, remember that LAN cables can only be subjected to a certain
amount of mechanical strain. Cables can be damaged or even destroyed by too
much tensile stress or pressure, by torsion or by bending them too sharply. The
following instructions will help you to avoid damage when installing LAN cables.
If cables are subjected to strain or stress as listed above, they should always be
replaced.
Storage and Transportation
During storage, transportation and cabling, the open ends of the LAN cable
(without connectors) must be kept closed with a shrink-on cover to prevent
oxidation of the cores and to keep dampness out of the cable.
Temperatures
During transportation, cabling and operation, the cable must not be exposed to
temperatures below the specified minimum temperature or above the specified
maximum temperature otherwise the electrical and mechanical characteristics of
the cables can deteriorate. The permitted temperature ranges of your LAN cable
can be found in the technical data sheets of the LAN cables in Chapters 4 and 5.
Tensile Strength
The tensile force exerted on the cables during or after installation must not exceed
the limits of tensile strength of the cables. The permitted tensile strain on your LAN
cable can be found in the technical data sheets of the bus cables in Chapters 4
and 5.
Pull Preassembled Cables Using Cable Grips
To pull preassembled cables, make sure that you use cable grips. These surround
the connector and protect it from damage when pulling in the cable.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-27
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Fitting strain relief
Make sure that you provide strain relief approximately 1 m from the connection
point on all cables subject to tensile force. Shield clamps are not adequate for
strain relief.
Pressure
Too much pressure on the cables must also be avoided, for example crimping the
cable when securing it in position.
Torsion
Torsion can lead to the elements of a cable being displaced and degrading the
electrical characteristics of cables. LAN cables must not be twisted.
Bending Radius
To avoid damage within the LAN cables, they must at no time be bent more
sharply than the minimum bending radius. Note that the permitted bending radii
Sare larger when pulling in the cable under tensile strain than in the fixed,
installed state
SBending radii for non-circular cables apply only to bending the flat, broader
surface. Bends in the narrower surface require much greater radii.
The permitted bending radii for your LAN cable can be found in the technical data
sheets of the LAN cables in Chapter 4 and 5.
Avoid Loops
When laying LAN cables, roll them tangentially from the cable drum or use
appropriate rotary tables. This prevents loops forming and resulting in kinks and
torsion.
Installing other Cables
Remember that cables must not be subjected to excessive strain and stress when
installed. This can, for example, happen when cables are installed along with other
cables on a common rack or in a common duct (providing this is electrically
permitted) and when new cables are pulled along the same path later (during
repairs or when extending a system).
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-28 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.8 Additional Instructions on Installing Fiber-Optic Cables
Protecting Connectors from Contamination
Fiber-optic cable connectors are sensitive to contamination. Unconnected male
and female connectors must be protected with the supplied dust caps.
Attenuation Variations under Load
During installation, fiber-optic cables must not be twisted, stretched or squashed.
The specified limit values for tensile strain, bending radii and temperature ranges
must be adhered to. During installation, the attenuation values can vary slightly,
these variations are, however, reversible providing the strain limits are not
exceeded.
Pull Cables Using Cable Grips and Protect Connectors
If the cable does not have a Kevlar pulling attachment, make sure that you use
cable grips. Before fitting the cable grip, make sure that the connectors of
preassembled cables are protected from the pressure exerted by the cable grip, for
example using a piece of protective tube.
Fitting Strain Relief
Although the BFOC connectors have their own strain relief and kink protection, it is
advisable to arrange for additional strain relief as close as possible to the
connected device to protect against mechanical strain.
Plan Adequate Attenuation Reserves
When installing cables over greater distances, it is advisable to take into account
one or more repair splices in the power loss budget.
Electromagnetic Immunity
Fiber-optic cables are immune to electromagnetic interference. Installing cables in
cable channels along with other cables (for example 230 V/380 V power supply
cables) causes no problems. When installing in cable channels, however, make
sure that the permitted strain on the fiber-optic cables is not exceeded when pulling
in other cables later.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-29
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.9 Fitting Twisted Pair Connectors
General
To maintain the excellent EMC and transmission characteristics of the twisted-pair
cabling system, connectors must be fitted with extreme care following the
installation instructions exactly.
How to fit 9-pin and 15-pin connectors is explained in detail on the following pages.
Note
Fit the sub-D connectors only to the 2x2 Industrial Twisted-Pair standard cable.
The cable clamp used for contacting the shield is designed for the diameter of this
cable.
These sub-D connectors are not suitable for fitting to Industrial Ethernet FC
cables.
9-Pin Sub-D Connector
Figure 7-7 shows all the components of a 9-Pin sub-D connector
Copper
band
Connector casing
Cable clamp
Cable clamp screw
Cover
Connector insert with
four screw
terminals
Cover screw
Figure 7-7 Industrial Twisted Pair Sub-D Connector (9-pin) for Assembly on Site
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-30 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Fitting the Connector
1. Remove approximately 30 mm of the outer sheath from the braided shield.
30
2. Cut the braided shield approximately 10 mm from the edge of the outer sheath
and
pull off the loose shield.
10
3. Turn back the braided shield over the outer sheath.
–Unwind the aluminum foil shield up to a point approximately 15 mm from the
folded back braided shield and cut off the unwound material.
–Remove the plastic foil and blind elements.
–Remove approximately 5 mm of the insulation from the conductors.
510 15
4. Wrap copper band around the braided shield
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-31
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5. Fit the connector
–Fit the connector insert into the connector casing
–Fit the lower cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing
–Assign the wire pairs to the screw terminals.
You will find the assignment required for a particular cable type in section
LEERER MERKER “Preassembled Industrial Twisted-Pair Cables”.
–Fit the cable into the connector casing so that the braided shield with the
copper band lies in the cable clamp
–Fit the upper cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing and
screw it tight
–Secure the conductors in the screw terminals
–Screw the cover on to the connector casing
5916
Shield foil
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
Braided shield
wrapped with copper
band
Figure 7-8 9-Pin Sub-D Male Connector Fitted to the Standard Cable
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-32 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
15-Pin Sub-D Connector
Figure 7-9 shows all the components of a 15-pin sub-D connector
Copper band
Cable clamp
Cover screw
Cover
Connector insert with
four screw terminals
Figure 7-9 15-Pin Sub-D Connector for User Assembly
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-33
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Fitting Connectors
1. Remove approximately 35 mm of the outer sheath from the braided screen.
35
2. Cut the braided shield approximately 10 mm from the edge of the outer sheath
and
pull off the loose shield.
Shorten the white-blue pair by approximately 3 mm to 32 mm
(to introduce the cable as shown in Figure 7-10).
white/blue
white/orange
10
32
3. - Fold back the braided shield over the outer sheath.
–Unwind the aluminum foil shield leaving approximately 15 mm (shorter pair)
or approximately 18 mm (longer pair) to the folded back braided shield and
cut off the unwound shield.
–Remove the plastic foil and blind element.
–Remove approximately 5 mm of the insulation from the conductors.
white/blue
white/orange
5
15
18
12
4. Wrap copper band around the braided shield
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-34 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
5. Fit the connector
–Fit the lower cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing.
–Fit the cable into the connector casing so that the braided shield with the
copper band lies in the cable clamp
–Fit the upper cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing and
screw it tight
–Assign pairs of wires to the screw terminals
You will find the assignment necessary for a particular cable type in Section
LEERER MERKER “Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair Cables”.
–Secure the conductors in the screw terminals
–Screw the cover on to the connector casing
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
512310
Braided shield
wrapped with copper
band
Shield foil
Figure 7-10 15-Pin Sub-D Male Connector Fitted to the Standard Cable
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-35
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.10 Installing and Wiring up the FC Outlet RJ-45
Components of the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect System
With the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect System, you can greatly reduce the time
required for installation and the sources of error during installation of LAN cabling.
The FC system consists of three components:
SIE FC Outlet RJ-45 with RJ-45 LAN jack and piercing terminal contacts for
connecting the RJ-45 connector technology with the FC cable in an industrial
environment
SCat5 Plus certified fast installation cables with copper cores (IE TP FC
Standard Cable, IE TP FC Trailing Cable and IE TP FC Marine Cable)
SIE FC Stripping Tool, the preset stripping tool.
These three components are ideally matched and allow an FC installation cable to
be assembled within approximately two minutes.
DTEs or network components can be connected to the FC Outlet RJ-45 in a wiring
cubicle or in a control room using preassembled patch cables with RJ-45
connectors.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-36 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Stripping the IE FC Cable with the IE FC Stripping Tool
Measure the length to be stripped
by holding the cable against the
template. Mark the position using
the index finger of your left hand.
Insert the measured end of the
cable into the tool
as far as allowed by the index fin-
ger of the left hand.
Clamp the end of the cable in the
stripping tool.
Turn the stripping tool several
times in the direction of the arrow
to strip the cable.
Keeping the tool closed, remove
it from the end of the cable.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-37
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Connecting the Prepared FC Cable to the IE FC Outlet RJ-45
Remove the protective foil from
the wires and the support ele-
ment from between the wires.
Spread out the wires according to
the color code shown on the con-
tact cover of the FC Outlet RJ-45.
Open the cover of FC Outlet
RJ-45.
Open both contact covers. Insert the wires of the IE FC ca-
ble fully into the contact cover ac-
cording to the color code.
Press down the two contact co-
vers to contact the wires.
Close and screw down the outer
cover of the FC Outlet RJ-45. Connect the DTE or network
component using a suitable
RJ-45 patch cable.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-38 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Installing the IE FC Outlet RJ-45
The FC Outlet RJ-45 can be installed on a rail or screwed to a mounting surface.
The Outlet RJ-45 can also be installed as a PG socket behind a wiring cubicle wall.
If this is required, nuts must be fitted in the openings on the sides.
23 mm
22 mm
90 mm
approx. 25 mm
4 x M4 screw,
length to suit
particular installa-
tion
4 x square nut M4
DIN 562 or
4 x hexagon nut A M4
DIN 439
Pin Assignment of the FC Outlet RJ-45
The assignment between the contacts of the RJ-45 jack and the insulation piercing
terminals for the FC TP cable is as follows:
RJ-45 Pin Insulation Piercing Terminals
Number Number Wire Color
1 1 yellow
2 3 orange
3 2 white
6 4 blue
Note
The FC TP cable between two FC Outlet RJ-45 devices must always 1:1. In other
words, terminal 1 must be connected terminal 1, terminal 2 to terminal 2 etc. If
crossovers are required, this should always be done with one of the patch cables
connected to the RJ-45 jack.
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-39
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
7.11 Connecting Fiber-Optic Cables
BFOC Connectors
Industrial Ethernet fiber-optic network components use only glass fiber-optic cables
with BFOC connectors.
Figure 7-11 BFOC Connectors with Dust Caps
Note
Connectors should only be fitted to glass fiber-optic cables by trained personnel.
When fitted correctly, they allow extremely low coupling attenuation and the value
can be repeated after inserting the connector several times.
Preassembled Cables
To be able to use glass fiber-optic cables with untrained personnel, glass fiber-optic
cables are also available with four BFOC connectors already fitted.
For ordering data, please refer to the current SIMATIC NET Catalog IK PI.
Fitting Connectors on Site
If it is necessary to fit connectors on site,
- BFOC connectors and suitable tools can be ordered (see IK PI)
- SIEMENS provides this service.
You can obtain further information from your Siemens contact in your local
Siemens office.
You will find the addresses:
– in our Catalog IK PI
– on the Internet (http//www.ad.siemens.de)
Guidelines for Installing Networked Automation Systems in Buildings
7-40 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
!Caution
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical
damage. Protect open connections with the supplied dust caps. Only remove the
dust cap immediately before making the connection.
8-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Installing Network Components in
Cubicles
Chapter Overview
8.1 IP Degrees of Protection 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 SIMATIC NET Components 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Installing Network Components in Cubicles
8-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
8.1 IP Degrees of Protection
General
Electrical equipment is normally surrounded by a protective casing.
The purpose of this casing includes
SProtection of persons from touching live components or moving parts
(accidental contact protection)
SProtection of equipment from intrusion of solid foreign bodies (solid body
protection)
SProtection of equipment from ingress of water (water protection).
IEC 60529, EN 60529 /15/
The degree of protection specifies the degree to which the casing meets these
three protective functions.
The degrees of protection are specified uniformly in the “International Standard
IEC 60529” or in the identical European standard EN 60529.
The degree of protection of a casing is indicated by a code. The code consists of
the letters IP (International Protection) followed by a code number for contact, solid
body and water protection as shown below:
IP 5 4
Code letters
(International Protection)
1st code number (0 through 6)
Contact and solid body protection
2nd code number (0 through 8)
Water protection
In some situations, the degree of protection is specified in even greater detail by
adding letters to the code numbers.
Installing Network Components in Cubicles
8-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Degree of Protection
The various degrees of protection are listed briefly in Tables 8-1 and 8-2. For more
detailed information on the individual ratings and the test conditions that must be
fulfilled, please refer to the standards listed above.
Table 8-1 Contact Protection (short form)
First
Number Protection of equipment from
intrusion of solid foreign
bodies
Protection of people from
access to dangerous parts
0not protected not protected
1≥ 50.0 mm diameter back of hand
2≥ 12.5 mm diameter finger
3≥ 2.5 mm diameter tool
4≥ 1.0 mm diameter wire
5dust protected wire
6 dustproof wire
Table 8-2 Water Protection (short form)
Second Number Protection of equipment from ingress of water
0not protected
1vertically falling drops of water
2falling water (15° from vertical)
3sprayed water
4 splashwater
5jet water
6strong jet water
7temporary immersion
8long period of immersion
Installing Network Components in Cubicles
8-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
8.2 SIMATIC NET Components
Ventilation Openings
The casings of most SIMATIC NET network components have ventilation
openings. To allow more effective cooling of the electronics components, ambient
air can flow through the casing. The maximum operating temperatures quoted in
the technical specifications apply only when there is unrestricted flow of air through
the ventilation openings.
Depending on the size of the ventilation openings, such modules comply with
degree of protection IP 20, IP 30 to IP 40. You will find the precise degree of
protection of a SIMATIC NET component in its operating instructions.
Components with the degrees of protection mentioned above do not provide
protection against dust and water! If the installation site requires such protection,
the components must be installed in an additional enclosure such as a switching
cubicle that provides the higher degree of protection (for example IP 65/ IP 67).
If you install these components in an additional enclosure, make sure that the
conditions required for operation are maintained!
Heat Dissipation
Make sure that the temperature inside the additional enclosure does not exceed
the permitted ambient temperature for the installed components. Select an
enclosure with adequate dimensions or use heat exchangers.
Outdoor Installation
If you install the equipment outdoors, make sure that the additional enclosure is not
subjected to direct sunlight. This can lead to a considerable rise in temperature
within the enclosure.
Clearances
Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the component so that
Sthe convection cooling of the component is not restricted
Scomponents do not cause neighboring components to heat up more than
permitted
Sthere is enough space for installing cabling
Sthere is enough space to remove components for maintenance or repair.
Installing Network Components in Cubicles
8-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Note
Regardless of the degree of protection of the casing, the electrical and optical
ports are always sensitive to
– mechanical damage
– damage caused by electrostatic contact discharge
– contamination by dust and fluids
Close unused ports with the supplied dust protection caps. Remove these caps
only immediately before connecting up the cables to the ports.
Standards
EN 60529:2000 degree of protection due to casing (IP Code) (IEC 60529:1999)
Further Literature
Klingberg, G.; Mähling, W.: Schaltschrank– und Gehäuse–Klimatisierung in der
Praxis (mit EMV); Heidelberg 1998
Installing Network Components in Cubicles
8-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Dimension Drawings
Chapter Overview
9.1 Optical Link Module (OLM) and Electrical Link Module (ELM) 9-2. . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Optical Switch Module (OSM) 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Electrical Switch Module ESM 9-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 ASGE Active Star Coupler 9-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 MINI OTDE Optical Transceiver 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 MINI UTDE RJ-45 Electrical Transceiver for Industrial Ethernet 9-10. . . . . . . .
9.7 Connectors 9-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8 Front View of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45 9-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.9 Side View of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45 9-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Dimension Drawings
9-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.1 Optical Link Module (OLM) and Electrical Link Module (ELM)
80
see Table
approx. 150
90
73
15
11011
15
Tilting/removing
the OLM
Figure 9-1 Industrial Ethernet OLM/ELM (dimensions in mm)
Cable Type Space Required
9-pin sub-D connector for user assembly on ITP standard
cable approx. 160 mm
Preassembled Cables
ITP standard cable 9/x
ITP XP standard cable 9/x approx. 95 mm
approx. 95 mm
Preassembled Cables
TP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet)
ITP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet) approx. 95 mm
approx. 95 mm
Dimension Drawings
9-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.2 Optical Switch Module (OSM)
Outer Dimensions and Clearances Required for Installation of the OSM ITP62,
OSM ITP62-LD, ITP53
11 130
approx. 150
217
15
Figure 9-2 Industrial Ethernet OSM ITPxx (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Outer Dimensions and Clearance Required for Installation of the OSM TP62
11 130
approx. 150
217
15
approx. 60
Figure 9-3 Industrial Ethernet OSM TPxx (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Side View of the OSM
15
Tilting/
removing the OSM see Table
68
Figure 9-4 Industrial Ethernet OSM (side view; dimensions in mm)
Cable Type Space Required1)
9-pin sub-D connector for user assembly on ITP
standard cable approx. 160 mm
Preassembled Cables
ITP standard cable 9/x
ITP XP standard cable 9/x approx. 95 mm
approx. 95 mm
Preassembled Cables
TP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet)
ITP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet) approx. 95 mm
approx. 95 mm
TP Cord 9-45/x (45° cable outlet)
TP XP Cord 9-45/x (45° cable outlet) approx. 65 mm
approx. 65 mm
1) for TP port and Standby-Sync port
Dimension Drawings
9-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.3 Electrical Switch ModuleESM
Outer Dimensions of the ESM ITP80
130
217
15
Figure 9-5 Industrial Ethernet ESM ITP80 (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Outer Dimensions of the ESM TP80
130
217
15
approx. 60 mm
Figure 9-6 Industrial Ethernet ESM TP80 (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Outer Dimensions and Clearance Required for Installing the ESM ITP80/TP80
(side view)
15
Tilting/
removing the ESM see Table
68
Figure 9-7 Industrial Ethernet ESM (side view; dimensions in mm)
Cable Type Space Required1)
9-pin sub-D connector for user assembly on ITP
standard cable approx. 160 mm
Preassembled Cables
ITP standard cable 9/x
ITP XP standard cable 9/x approx. 95 mm
approx. 95 mm
Preassembled Cables
TP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet)
ITP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet) approx. 95 mm
approx. 95 mm
TP Cord 9-45/x (45° cable outlet)
TP XP Cord 9-45/x (45° cable outlet) approx. 65 mm
approx. 65 mm
1) for TP port and Standby-Sync port
Dimension Drawings
9-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.4 ASGE Active Star Coupler
Front View of the ASGE Active Star Coupler
449 (for installation in a 19” cabinet)
133
Figure 9-8 ASGE Active Star Coupler (front view; dimensions in mm)
Side View of the ASGE Active Star Coupler
Since the fiber-optic cable with its minimum bend radius and connector length
takes the most space of all possible cables, it is used here as a guideline for the
minimum clearance to the front of the ASGE active star coupler. At the back,
space must be left for one or more power supply connectors.
150
297
90
Figure 9-9 ASGE Active Star Coupler (side view; dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.5 Optical Transceiver
At both ends of the optical transceiver, a clearance of approximately 100 mm to the
metal casing must be maintained for the AUI or fiber-optic cable. This distance is
necessary to keep to the maximum bend radius with the connector length already
included in the calculation (see, for example Figure 9-10).
21 91
44
Figure 9-10 MINI-OTDE Optical Transceiver (dimensions in mm)
9.6 Mini UTDE RJ-45 Electrical Transceiver
21
82
44
OFF ON
SQE test
UTDE
Figure 9-11 Mini-UTDE RJ-45 Electrical Transceiver (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-11
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.7 Connectors
9-pin Sub-D Connector
The 9-pin sub D connector for user assembly and the version used on
preassembled cables have different cable outlets. This results in different bend
radii for the outgoing cable (see Figure 9-12 and Figure 9-13). The specified bend
radii apply to the ITP standard cable.
37 6
57
approx.
100
15
31
14
Figure 9-12 9-pin Sub-D Connector for User Assembly (dimensions in mm)
37 6
50
approx. 45
15
31
Figure 9-13 9-pin sub-D Connector on Preassembled Cable (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-12 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
15-pin Sub-D Connector
The 15-pin sub D connector for user assembly and the version used on
preassembled cables have different cable outlets. This results in different bend
radii for the outgoing cable (see Figure 9-14 and Figure 9-15). The specified bend
radii apply to the ITP standard cable.
The outlet direction of the cable can be adjusted in both connector versions in
stages -30°, 0° (horizontal) and +30°.
47
40
13
15 65
Figure 9-14 15-pin Sub-D Connector for User Assembly (dimensions in mm)
50
40
6
15
47
Figure 9-15 15-pin sub-D Connector on Preassembled Cable (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-13
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
RJ-45 Connector
15
23approx.
30
9
14
Figure 9-16 RJ-45 Connector (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-14 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.8 Front View of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45
30
108
SIEMENS
22.8
Recommended installation cutout
for real wall installation
90
25
22.8
5
21
Figure 9-17 IE FC Outlet RJ-45 (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-15
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
9.9 Side View of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45
approx.
90
37
15
Tilting/
removing the
IE FC Outlet RJ-45
Figure 9-18 IE FC Outlet RJ-45 (dimensions in mm)
Dimension Drawings
9-16 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
A-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
References
Manuals and Further Information
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet is based on the following standards and
directives:
/1/ ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3–1993 (ISO/IEC 8802–3: 1993)
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications
/2/ IEEE Std 802.3c–1985
Supplement to 802.3–Repeater Unit for 10 Mb/s Baseband Networks
(Sections 9.1–9.8)
/3/ IEEE Std 802.3i–1990
Supplement to 802.3 – System Considerations for Multisegment 10
M/S Baseband Networks (Section 13) and Twisted Pair Medium
Attachment Unit and Baseband Med Spec, Type 10BASE–T (Section
14)
/4/ IEEE 802.3j–1993
Supplement to 802.3 – Fiber Optic Active and Passive Star–Based
Segments, Type 10BASE–F (Sections 15–18)
/5/ IEEE Std 802.3u–1995
Local and Metropolitan Area Networks–Supplement – Media Access
Control (MAC) Parameters, Physical Layer, Medium Attachment Units
and Repeater for 100 MB/s Operation, Type 100BASE–T (Clauses
21–30)
The following manuals contain information on SIMATIC NET
Industrial Ethernet:
/6/ SIMATIC NET Manual for Triaxial Networks
Order number: 6GK1970–1AA20–0AA1
/7/ SIMATIC NET Manual Ethernet (ASGE Star Coupler)
Order number: HIR: 943 320–001 German
Order number: HIR: 943 320–011 English
A
References
A-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
For information on SIMATIC NET OSM/ESM Network Management,
refer to
/8/ SIMATIC NET OSM/ESM
Network Management, manual
This documentation is available on the CS manual server
(http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi).
Search for entry ID 2928320
The following manuals contain information on networking SIMATIC
programmable controllers:
/9/ SIMATIC S7–300 Programmable Controller,
Hardware and Installation Manual
SIEMENS AG
Part of the “S7–300, M7–300 Documentation Package,
Order number: 6ES7 398–8AA01–8AA1”
/10/ SIMATIC S7–400, M7–400 Programmable Controller,
Hardware and Installation Manual
SIEMENS AG
Part of the “S7–400, M7–400 Documentation Package,
Order number: 6ES7 498–8AA01–8AA1”
Order numbers
The order numbers of the SIEMENS documentation listed above can be found in
the catalogs SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication, Catalog IK PI” and
”SIMATIC Components for Fully Integrated Automation, Catalog ST 70”.
You can order these catalogs and obtain further information and details of available
training courses from your local SIEMENS office or national head office.
References
A-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
For information on information technology networking,
refer to the following European standards:
/11/ EN 50173
Information Technology – Generic Cabling Systems.
/12/ EN 50174–1
Information Technology – Cabling System Installation
Part 1: Specification and Quality Assurance
/13/ EN 50174–2:2000
Information Technology – Cabling System Installation
Part 2: Installation Planning and Practices inside Buildings
/14/ EN 50174–3
Information Technology – Cabling System Installation
Part 3: Installation Planning and Practices outside Buildings
Standards on the Safety of Devices
/15/ EN 60529 / (IEC 60529)
Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
/16/ EN 60825–1 / (IEC 60825–1)
Safety of Laser Products
Part 1: Classification of Systems, Requirements and User Guidelines
/17/ EN 60825–2 / (IEC 60825–2)
Safety of Laser Products
Part 2: Safety of Optical Fiber Communication Systems
/18/ EN 60950 / (IEC 60950, modified)
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
/19/ EN 61010–1 / (IEC 61010–1, modified)
Safety Regulations for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control,
and Laboratory Use
/20/ EN 61131–2 / (IEC 61131–2)
Programmable Controllers
Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests
References
A-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
European Standards for AC Distribution Systems, Grounding and Bonding
Systems:
/21/ EN 50310:2000
Application of Equipotential Bonding and Earthing in Buildings with
Information Technology
/22/ HD 384.3 S2
Electrical Installations of Buildings
Part 3: Assessment of General Characteristics
(IEC 60364–3:1993, modified)
/23/ HD 384.4.41 S2
Electrical Installations of Buildings
Part 4: Protection for Safety
Section 41: Protection against Electric Shock
(IEC 60364–4–41:1992, modified)
/24/ HD 384.4.47 S2
Electrical Installations of Buildings
Part 4: Protection for Safety
Chapter 47: Application of Protective Measures for Safety
Section 470.’ General
Section 471: Measures for Protection against Electric Shock (IEC
60364–4–47:1981 + A 1:1993, modified)
/25/ HD 384.4.482 S1, Electrical Installations of Buildings
Part 4: Protection for Safety
Chapter 48: Choice of Protective Measures as a Function of external
Influences
Section 482: Protection against Fire
/26/ HD 384.4.54 S1, Electrical Installations of Buildings
Part 5: Selection and Erection of Electrical Equipment
Chapter 54: Earthing Arrangements and protective Conductors
(IEC 60364–5–54:1980, modified)
References
A-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
International Standards for AC Distribution Systems, Grounding and Bonding
Systems:
/27/ IEC 60364–3
Electrical installations of buildings;
part 3: Assessment of general characteristics
/28/ IEC 60364–4–41
Electrical installations of buildings
Part 4: Protection for safety
Chapter 41: Protection against electric shock
/29/ IEC 60364–4–47
Electrical installations of buildings.
Part 4 : Protection for safety.
Chapter 47 : Application of protective measures for safety.
/30/ IEC 60364–5–54
Electrical installations of buildings
Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical equipment
Chapter 54: Earthing arrangements and protective conductors
References
A-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
B-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
SIMATIC NET – Support and Training
Customer Support, Technical Support
Open round the clock, worldwide:
Johnson City
Nuremberg
Singapore
SIMATIC Hotline
Worldwide (Nuremberg)
Technical Support
(free contact)
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 7:00 to 17:00
Telephone: +49 (0)180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0)180 5050-223
E-mail: techsupport@
ad.siemens.de
GMT: +1:00
Worldwide (Nuremberg)
Technical Support
(charged only with SIMATIC Card)
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 0:00 to 24:00
Telephone: +49 (0)911 895-7777
Fax: +49 (0)911 895-7001
GMT: +01:00
Europe / Africa (Nuremberg)
Authorization
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 7:00 to 17:00
Telephone: +49 (0)911 895-7200
Fax: +49 (0)911 895-7201
E-mail: authorization@
nbgm.siemens.de
GMT: +1:00
America (Johnson City)
Technical Support and
Authorization
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 19:00
Telephone: +1 (0)423 461-2522
Fax: +1 (0)423 461-2289
E-mail: simatic.hotline@
sea.siemens.com
GMT: -5:00
Asia / Australia (Singapore)
Technical Support and
Authorization
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:30 to 17:30
Telephone: +65 (0)740-7000
Fax: +65 (0)740-7001
E-mail: simatic.hotline@
sae.siemens.com.sg
GMT: +8:00
The languages spoken on the hotlines are German and English. On the authorization hotline, French, Italian and Spa-
nish are also available.
B
SIMATIC NET – Support and Training
B-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Training Center
To help you become familiar with SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers, we offer
training courses. Please contact your regional training center or the central training
center in D 90327 Nuremberg.
Tel. +49 (0) 911–895–3154
Infoline: Tel. +49 (0) 1805 23 56 11 , Fax. +49 (0) 1805 23 56 12
Internet: http://www.ad.siemens.de/training
E–mail: AD–Training@nbgm.siemens.de
SIMATIC Customer Support Online Services
The SIMATIC Customer Support team provides you with comprehensive additional
information on SIMATIC products in its online services:
SYou can obtain general current information:
– On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/net
– Using fax polling no. 08765 - 93 02 77 95 00
SCurrent Product Information leaflets and downloads which you may find useful
for your product are available:
– On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/net
– Via the Bulletin Board System (BBS) in Nuremberg (SIMATIC Customer
Support Mailbox) under the number +49 (911) 895-7100.
To access the mailbox, use a modem with V.34 (28.8 Kbps) capability whose
parameters you should set as follows: 8, N, 1, ANSI, or dial in using ISDN
(x.75, 64 Kbps).
Further Support
if you have further questions on SIMATIC NET products, please contact your
Siemens representative in your local Siemens office.
You will find the addresses listed
Sin our catalog IK PI
Son the Internet (http://www.ad.siemens.de)
SIMATIC NET -- Support and Training
B-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Ordering Special Cables
You can order special cables and special lengths of all SIMATIC NET LAN cables
from
A&D SE V22
WKF Fürth
Hr. Hertlein
Tel.: +49 911 /750--4465
Fax: +49 911/750--9991
email: juergen.hertlein@fthw.siemens.de
Noise--Free Power Distribution Systems
You can get help on planning and installing noise--free power distribution systems
for buildings with networked data processing systems and on interference analysis
and elimination in existing systems from:
Siemens AG
Industrial Solutions and Services
I&S IS BLN2
Thomas Gerlach
Gartenfelder Straße 29
D--13599 Berlin
Tel.(030)386--34809
Fax (030) 386 --3 4921
Mobil (01 72) 3 07 95 44
E--Mail: Thomas.Gerlach@bln2.siemens.de
SIMATIC NET – Support and Training
B-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1
Description and operating instructions
Link Modules for Industrial Ethernet
SIMATIC NET
Industrial Ethernet
OLM V2.0 / ELM
The SIMATIC NET link modules for
Industrial Ethernet allow Ethernet networks
to be constructed flexibly in accordance
with IEEE standard 802.3 using optical
waveguide (F/O) and copper technology.
The link modules provide several connec-
tion options in one piece of equipment and
are plugged onto the standard bar.
The OLMs (optical link modules) have three
industrial twisted pair (ITP) interfaces and
two BFOC optical interfaces. It is possible to
connect up to three pieces of terminal
equipment or other ITP segments using
ITPs, and F/Os can be used to connect up to
two more pieces of terminal equipment or
optical network components (OLM, ECFL2,
Mini-OTDE, etc.).
Besides the three industrial twisted pair
(ITP) interfaces, the ELMs (electrical link
modules) have an AUI interface. It is possi-
ble to connect an Ethernet segment to a
CSMA/CD local area network (LAN) with a
transmission speed of 10 Mbit/s via the AUI
interface.
Both modules conform to the specifications
of ISO/IEC standard 8802-3.
You will find a detailed description of con-
structing a network with link modules and
notes on network planning and installation
in the “Industrial Twisted Pair” manual.
Order no.
6GK1102-4AA00/
6GK1102-5AA00
Industrial Ethernet OLM V2.0
Industrial Ethernet ELM
SIMATIC NET OLM Industrial Ethernet
P 1
DA
P 2
Port 1
Port 2
CD
Port 3
LS1
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
P 1
DA
P 2
Port 1
Port 2
CD
Port 3
SIMATIC NET ELM Industrial Ethernet
LS1
LS2
LS3
2
We have checked that the contents of the
technical publication agree with the hard-
ware and software described. However, it is
not possible to rule out deviations comple-
tely, so we are unable to guarantee comple-
te agreement. However, the details in the
technical publication are checked regularly.
Any corrections which prove necessary are
contained in subsequent editions. We are
grateful for suggestions for improvement.
We reserve the right to make technical
modifications.
Permission is not given for the circulation
or reproduction of this document, its use or
the passing on of its contents unless gran-
ted expressly. Contravention renders the
perpetrator liable for compensation for
damages. All rights reserved, in particular
in the case of patent grant or registration of
a utility or design.
Copyright © Siemens AG 1998
All Rights Reserved
Note
We would point out that the content of
these operating instructions is not part of,
nor is it intended to amend an earlier or exi-
sting agreement, permit or legal relation-
ship. All obligations on Siemens arise from
the respective purchasing agreement which
also contains the full warranty conditions
which have sole applicability. These con-
tractual warranty conditions are neither
extended nor restricted by comments in
these operating instructions.
We would furthermore point out that for
reasons of simplicity, these operating
instructions cannot describe every
conceivable problem associated with the
use of this equipment. Should you require
further information or should particular
problems occur which are not treated in
sufficient detail in the operating instruc-
tions, you can request the necessary infor-
mation from your local Siemens office.
General
Electricity is used to operate this equip-
ment. Comply in every detail with the safety
requirements specified in the operating
instructions regarding the voltages to
apply!
vWarning!
If warning notes are ignored, it is
therefore possible for severe injuries
and/or material damage to occur.
Only appropriately qualified staff
should work on or near this equip-
ment. Such staff must be thoroughly
acquainted with all the warnings
and maintenance measures contai-
ned in these operating instructions.
The proper and safe operation of
this equipment assumes proper
transport, appropriate storage and
assembly and careful operation and
maintenance.
Staff qualification
requirements
Qualified staff within the meaning of these
operating instructions or the warning notes
are persons familiar with setting up, assem-
bling, starting up and operating this product
and who have appropriate qualifications to
cover their activities, such as:
– training or instruction/entitlement to
switch circuits and equipment/systems on
and off, earth them and identify them in
accordance with current safety standards;
– training or instruction in accordance with
current safety standards in looking after
and using appropriate safety equipment;
– first aid training.
3
Safety guidelines
vWarning!
The OLM/ELM units are designed for
operation with safety extra-low vol-
tage. Accordingly, only safety extra-
low voltages (SELV) to
IEC950/EN60950/VDE0805 may be
connected to the supply voltage
connections.
1. Functional description
1.1 GENERAL FUNCTIONS
Signal regeneration
The OLM/ELM processes the signal shape
and amplitude of the data received.
Retiming
In order to prevent jitter increasing over
several segments, the OLM/ELM retimes the
data to be transmitted.
Preamble regeneration
The OLM/ELM supplements lost preamble
bits from data received to 64 bits (incl. the
start of frame delimiter (SFD)).
Fragment extension
Collisions can cause short fragments to
occur. If the OLM/ELM receives a fragment,
this is supplemented to give the minimum
length of 96 bits. This ensures reliable colli-
sion detection by all network participants.
Collision handling
If the OLM/ELM detects a data collision, it
interrupts the transmission. For the
duration of the collision, the collided data
package is replaced by a jam signal to
ensure collision detection by the terminal
equipments.
Auto partitioning
Network failures can be caused by perma-
nent occupancy, interrupted lines, lack of
terminating resistors, damaged cable insu-
lation and frequent collisions due to electro-
magnetic interference. In order to protect
the network from such failures, the
OLM/ELM in this case separates the seg-
ment in the receiving direction from the rest
of the network.
The OLM/ELM has this auto partitioning
function individually at each port. The other
ports can thus continue to be operated
without interference if one of the ports has
been auto partitioned. In the event of auto
partitioning, transmission continues into
the ITP segment or the F/O line but recepti-
on at this port is blocked.
With twisted pair, auto partitioning is activa-
ted if
– a data collision lasts longer than 105 µs or
– there are more than 64 consecutive data
collisions.
With F/O, auto partitioning becomes active
when
– a data collision lasts longer than 1.5 ms
(normal mode) or 0.2 ms (redundant
mode) or
– there are more than 64 (normal mode) or
16 (redundant mode) consecutive data
collisions.
Reconnection
The segment is reconnected to the network
as soon as a package with the minimum
length of 51 µs is received without collision
at the relevant port, i. e. when the segment
is working properly again.
When the redundant mode is active, packa-
ges >51 µs sent at a F/O port without
collision also lead to reconnection.
Jabber control
Due to a defective bus coupler or LAN con-
troller, for example, the network can be con-
tinuously occupied with data. To protect
against this, the OLM/ELM interrupts
reception
– at the affected ITP or AUI port after 5.5
ms. 9.6 µs after the end of the error the
auto partitioning will be canceled.
(jabber lockup protection)
– at the relevant F/O port after 3.9 ms. 420
ms after the end of the error the auto par-
titioning will be canceled.
(Rx jabber)
1.2 SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS OF THE
ITP INTERFACE
Link control
The OLM/ELM monitors the connected ITP
line segments for short-circuit or interrupt
using regular link test pulses in accordance
with IEEE standard 802.3 10BASE-T. The
OLM/ELM does not transmit any data in an
ITP segment from which it does not receive
a link test pulse.
Note: A non-occupied interface is assessed
as a line interrupt. The ITP line to terminal
equipment which is switched off is likewise
assessed as a line interrupt as the de-
energised bus coupler cannot transmit link
test pulses.
Auto polarity exchange
If the reception line pair is incorrectly
connected (RD+ and RD- switched) polarity
is automatically reversed.
1.3 SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS OF THE
F/O INTERFACE
Link control
The OLM monitors the connected F/O lines
for interrupts using regular link test pulses
in accordance with IEEE standard 802.3
10BASE-FL. The OLM transmits no data to
an F/O line from which it is receiving no link
test pulse.
Redundancy
In areas where data security has top priori-
ty, it is possible with the aid of the redun-
dancy function to bridge any failure of an
F/O line or OLM. To do so, a replacement
line is frequently routed in a different cable
run. In the event of a fault, there is an auto-
matic switch between the main line and the
replacement. A cross-link within the bus
structure creates a ring (see Fig. 6). If any
OLM link or OLM fails, every other OLM can
still be reached with the aid of the redun-
dant run.
1.4 DISPLAY ELEMENTS
Equipment status
The 4 LEDs on top provide information
about statuses which affect the function of
the entire OLM/ELM.
P1 – Power 1 (green LED)
– lit: supply voltage 1 present
– lit not: – supply voltage 1 not present,
– hardware fault in OLM/ELM
P2 – Power 2 (green LED)
– lit: supply voltage 2 present
– lit not: – supply voltage 2 not present,
– hardware fault in OLM/ELM
DA – Data (yellow LED)
– lit: OLM/ELM receiving data at at least 1
interface
– lit not: – OLM/ELM not receiving data at
any interface,
– hardware fault in OLM/ELM
Depending on network load, the illuminati-
on of the LED can vary between a brief
lighting up to permanent illumination.
CD – Collision Detect (red LED)
– lit: data collision detected at OLM/ELM
level
– lit not: – no data collision at OLM/ELM
level
Port Status ELM
These groups of LEDs display port-related
information.
LS1 to LS3 - link status of the ITP
ports (3 x green LED)
– lit: ELM receiving link test pulses from
ITP segment,
– the ITP segment connected is
working properly
– lit not: ELM is not receiving any link test
pulses from ITP segment,
– the assigned ITP port is not
connected,
– the equipment connected is
switched off,
– the ITP line is interrupted or
short-circuited
Port Status OLMV2.0
These groups of LEDs display port-related
information.
LS1 to LS3 - link status of the ITP
ports (3 x green LED)
– lit: OLM receiving link test pulses
from ITP segment,
– the ITP segment connected is
working properly
– flashes 2 times
per period: port has auto partitioned
– lit not: OLM is not receiving any link test
pulses from ITP segment,
– the assigned ITP port is not
connected,
– the equipment connected is
switched off,
– the ITP line is interrupted or
short-circuited
LS4 – link status of F/O port 4
(green LED)
– lit: OLM receiving link test pulses
from F/O segment,
– the F/O segment connected is
working properly
4
AUI connection (ELM)
An AUI port to IEEE 802.3 enables ELM
equipment to be connected to an Ethernet
segment via a bus coupler. The data and CD
lines of the AUI port are DC-decoupled from
the supply voltages. The voltage (+ 12 V DC)
to supply a bus coupler has the earth of the
supply voltage as a reference potential.
Note: When connecting the ELM to a
SINEC bus coupler with 2 interfaces (level 4
of issue or less), use only the left-hand
interface of the coupler.
Fig. 5: Pin configuration of 5-pin terminal
block
+24 V
+24 V *
Fault
L1+
L2+
M
F1
F2
GND
Collision in CI-A
Transmit DO-A
GND
Receive DI-A
GND
not used
GND
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Collision in CI-B
Transmit DO-B
GND
Receive DI-B
Voltage +12 V / 0,5 A
GND
not used
Fig. 4: Pin configuration of AUI interface
Pin 6 RD-
Pin 7 n.c.
Pin 8 n.c.
Pin 9 TD-
RD+ Pin 1
n.c. Pin 2
n.c. Pin 3
n.c. Pin 4
TD+ Pin 5
Fig. 3: Pin configuration of an ITP interface
1.5 CONTROLS
6-pin DIP switch
Using the 6-pin DIP switch on the top of the
OLM/ELM housing
– the message about the link statuses can
be suppressed by the indicator contact on
a port-by-port basis. Using switches LA1
to LA5 (LA1 to LA3 on the ELM), the mes-
sage about the link status of ports 1 to 5
(1 to 3 on ELM) is suppressed. State on
delivery: switch position 1 (on), i.e. messa-
ge not suppressed.
- port 5 can be switched to redundant mode
(on the OLM). State on delivery: switch
position 0 (off), i.e. port 5 in normal mode.
Fig. 1: 6-pin DIP switch on OLM
LA1
R5
Off On
LA5
LA3
LA2
LA4
Port 1
Port 5
Port 5
Port 3
Port 2
Port 4 about link status
Suppress message
via indicator contact
Redundant mode
Fig. 2: 6-pin DIP switch on ELM
LA1
Off On
LA3
LA2 Port 1
Port 3
Port 2 about link status
Suppress message
via indicator contact
not configured
F/O connection (OLM)
2 optical ports to 10BASE-FL (BFOC/2.5 (ST)
sockets) enable OLM equipment to be cas-
caded as well as redundant rings to be con-
structed using F/Os and terminal equipment
to be connected.
5-pin terminal block
The supply voltage and the indicator
contact are connected via a 5-pin terminal
block with screw locking mechanism.
1.6 INTERFACES
ITP connection
Three 9-pin sub-D sockets enable three
independent ITP segments to be connected.
The socket casings are electrically connec-
ted to the front panel and thus connected to
the housing of the OLM/ELM.
Mechanical locking is by means of a
UNC 4-40 screw locking mechanism.
– Pin configuration of the 9-pin sub-D
socket:
– TD+: pin 5, TD-: pin 9
– RD+: pin 1, RD-: pin 6
– remaining pins: not configured.
– flashes 2 times
per period: port has auto partitioned
– lit not: OLM not receiving any link test
pulses from F/O segment,
– the assigned F/O port is not
connected,
– the equipment connected is
switched off,
– the F/O receiving fibre is inter-
rupted
LS5 – Link status of F/O port 5
(green LED)
Normal mode switched on
– lit: OLM receiving link test pulses
from F/O segment,
– the connected redundant F/O
segment is working properly
– flashes 2 times
per period: port has auto partitioned
– lit not: OLM not receiving any link test
pulses from F/O segment,
– the assigned F/O port is not
connected,
– the equipment connected is
switched off,
– the F/O receiving fibre is inter-
rupted
LS5 – Link status of F/O port 5
(green LED)
Redundant mode switched on
– lit: OLM receiving link test pulses
from F/O segment,
– the connected redundant F/O
segment is working properly
and is active,
– flashes 1 time
per period: OLM receiving link test pul-
ses from F/O segment,
– the connected redundant F/O
segment is working properly
and is in stand-by mode,
– lit not: OLM not receiving any link test
pulses from F/O segment,
– the assigned F/O port is not
connected,
– the equipment connected is
switched off,
– the F/O receiving fibre is inter-
rupted
vWarning!
The OLM/ELM equipment is desi-
gned for operation with SELV. Only
safety extra-low voltages to
IEC950/EN60950/VDE0805 may
therefore be connected to the
supply voltage connections and to
the indicator contact.
– Voltage supply: The voltage supply can
be connected to be redundant. Both
inputs are decoupled. There is no load
distribution. With redundant supply, the
power pack supplies the OLM/ELM alone
with the higher output voltage. The
supply voltage is electrically isolated from
the housing.
– Indicator contact: Contract interrupt
indicates the following by means of a
potential-free indicator contact (relay
contact, closed circuit):
– the failure of at least one of the two
supply voltages.
– a permanent fault in the link module
(internal 5 V DC voltage, supply voltage
1 or 2 not in the permissible range).
– the faulty link status of at least one F/O
(on OLM) or ITP port.
The indication of the link state might be
masked on a port-by-port basis using
DIP switches.
– at least one port has auto partitioned.
Port 5 in redundant mode doesn’t indi-
cate the state „auto partitioning“,
because this function characterizes the
error free state of the optical ring.
Note: In the case of the voltage supply
being routed without redundancy, the
OLM/ELM indicates the failure of a supply
voltage. You can prevent this message by
feeding in the supply voltage through both
inputs.
2. Configuration
2.1 LINE STRUCTURE
The OLM/ELM enables line structures to be
built up. Cascading can be effected using
both the ITP and F/O ports (OLM) or with a
bus coupler via the AUI port (ELM).
MWhen cascading via ITP ports, use a
cable which crosses the signal pairs, i.e.
in each case connects output to input.
Detailed planning rules (cascade depth etc.)
can be found in the “Industrial Twisted Pair
Networks” manual.
5
Industrial
twisted pair
line F/O line
Industrial
twisted pair
line
Ring
with redundant run
DTE
Twisted
Pair
Transceiver
TPTR
DTE
TPTR
OLM OLM OLM OLM
Port 5
Port 4
Fig. 6: Redundant ring structure via the F/O ports of the OLM equipments
4. Further support
In the event of technical queries, please talk
to your Siemens contact in the
agencies/offices responsible for looking
after you. You can find the addresses
– in our IK10 catalogue
– and on the Internet
(http://www.ad.siemens.de)
Our hotline is also at your disposal:
Tel: +49 911 895-7000 (Fax: -7001)
Fig. 7: Assembling the OLM/ELM
P 1
DA
P 2
Port 1
Port 2
CD
Port 3
SIMATIC NET OLM f. Industrial Ethernet
LS1
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
locking slide
Fig. 8: Dismantling the OLM/ELM
Notes:
– The housing of the OLM/ELM is grounded
via the standard bar. There is no separate
ground connection.
– The screws in the lateral half-shells of the
housing may not be undone under any
circumstances.
– The shielding ground of the industrial twi-
sted pair lines which can be connected is
electrically connected to the housing.
3.3 STARTUP PROCEDURE
You start up the OLM/ELM by connecting
the supply voltage via the 5-pin terminal
block. Lock the terminal block with the
locking screw at the side.
3.4 DISMANTLING
To take the OLM/ELM off the standard bar,
insert a screwdriver horizontally under the
housing into the locking slide, pull it (with-
out tipping the screwdriver) downwards
and fold the OLM/ELM upwards (Fig. 8).
3. Assembly, startup procedure
and dismantling
3.1 UNPACKING, CHECKING
– Check whether the package was delivered
complete (see scope of delivery).
– Check the individual parts for transport
damage.
vWarning!
Use only undamaged parts!
3.2 ASSEMBLY
The equipment is delivered in a ready-to-
operate condition. The following procedure
is appropriate for assembly:
– Check whether the switch pre-setting suits
your requirements.
– Pull the terminal block off the OLM/ELM
and wire up the supply voltage and indica-
tor lines.
– Fit the OLM/ELM on a 35 mm standard bar
to DIN EN 50 022.
– Suspend the upper snap-in hook of the
OLM/ELM in the standard bar, insert a
screwdriver horizontally under the hou-
sing into the locking slide pull this down-
wards (cf. Fig. 8, Dismantling) and press
the bottom of the module onto the stan-
dard bar until it locks in position (Fig. 7).
– Fit the signal lines.
2.2 REDUNDANT RING STRUCTURE
(OLM)
Redundant ring structures can be built up
using the F/O ports of the OLM. Figure 6
shows a redundant ring structure with OLM
equipment. To do so, the first piece of
equipment is connected to the last in the
fiber optical line structure consisting of
OLM equipment (see above) and the redun-
dant fiber optical ring thus closed.
To do so, the redundant connection on pre-
cisely one of the two OLMs is to be connec-
ted to port 5, and port 5 switched to redun-
dant mode. Switchover is effected at the 6-
pin DIP switch on top of the equipment (see
chapter entitled “Functional description -
Controls”.
Note: All the modules in the redundant
ring may only be connected to one another
via F/O runs (ECFL2, ECFL4).
2.3 COMBINATION WITH
CONCENTRATORS OF THE ASGE, MC
AND AMC FAMILY
The OLM/ELM can also be combined with
concentrators of the ASGE, MC and AMC
family. The OLM/ELMs can be cascaded for
example in line structures via the ECFL2,
ECFL4, ECTP3 etc. interface cards.
The number of pieces of equipment which
can be cascaded depends on the overall
network structure. Redundant ring
structures can be implemented via the F/O
ports (OLM).
Hints on calculating the maximum network
expansion can be found in the Ethernet
manual, Chapter 8 (see „Technical Data“ for
order number).
OLM
A maximum of 11 OLMs might be cascaded
in a fiber optical line.
Here the total line length between the termi-
nal equipments with the maximum distance
might not exceed 1180 m.
The total line length is determined by the
total sum of all F/O line sections and the
two ITP lines to the terminal equipments.
ELM
A maximum of 13 OLMs/ELMs might be
cascaded in an ITP line, with a maximum
length of 100 m per ITP line.
A maximum of 2050 m total line length is
allowed between two terminal equipments.
6
5. Technical data
General data
Operating voltage DC 18 to 32 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV) (redundant inputs decoupled)
Current consumption typ. 160 mA (OLM) respectively 80 mA (ELM) at 24 VDC (without AUI-load)
max. 280 mA (OLM) respectively 430 mA (ELM) at 24 VDC (with AUI-load)
Overload current protection at input non-changeable thermal fuse
Dimensions W x H x D 80 mm x 140 mm x 85 mm
Mass OLM 900 g, ELM 850 g
Ambient temperature 0 ºC to + 60 ºC
Storage temperature - 40 ºC to + 80 ºC
Humidity 10% to 90% (not-condensing)
Protection class IP 30 (OLM), IP 40 (ELM)
Radio interference level EN 55022 Class B
Interference immunity EN 50082-2
Network size
Transition ITP-Port ↔ITP-Port (OLM, ELM) F/O port ↔F/O port (OLM)
Propagation equivalent 190 m 260 m
Variability Value 3 BT 3 BT
Transition ITP-Port ↔F/O port (OLM) ITP-Port ↔AUI-Port (ELM)
Propagation equivalent 360 m 190 m
Variability Value 6 BT 3 BT
F/O port (OLM ↔OLM)
Optical output power
Graded-index fiber 50/125 µm (average) min. -22,0 dBm max. -16,2 dBm
Graded-index fiber 62,5/125 µm (average) min. -19,0 dBm max. -12,4 dBm
Optical input power min. -33,0 dBm
ITP line length (ITP-Port ↔ITP-Port)
Length of an industrial twisted pair segment max. 100 m
AUI line length (AUI-Port ↔AUI-Port)
Length of an AUI cable max. 50 m
F/O line length (example)
50/125 µm fiber max. 2.600 m
62,5/125 µm fiber max. 3.100 m
Scope of delivery
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
OLM V2.0/ELM incl.
terminal block for supply voltage
description and operating instructions
Order number
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OLM V2.0 6GK1102-4AA00
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet ELM 6GK1102-5AA00
Accessories
“Industrial Twisted Pair Networks” manual 6GK1970-1BA00-0AA0
Ethernet manual HIR:943 320-011
Notes on CE identification
The link modules for Industrial
Ethernet comply with the regulati-
ons of the following European
directive:
89/336/EEC
Council Directive on the harmoni-
sation of the legal regulations of
member states on electromagnetic
compatibility (amended by Direc-
tives 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and
93/68/EEC).
Area used Requirements for
emitted interference interference immunity
Residential EN 50081-1: 1992 EN 50082-1: 1992
Industrial EN 50081-2: 1993 EN 50082-2: 1995
The product can be used in the residential
sphere (residential sphere, business and
trade sphere and small companies) and in
the industrial sphere.
The precondition for compliance with EMC
limit values is strict adherence to the con-
struction guidelines specified in this
description and operating instructions and
in the “Industrial Twisted Pair Networks”
manual!
The EU declaration of conformity is kept
available for the responsible authorities in
accordance with the above-mentioned EU
directives at:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und
Antriebstechnik
Industrielle Kommunikation (A&D PT2)
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
737 211-002-01-0298
Printed in Germany
SIMATIC NET
Industrial Ethernet
OSM/ESM
Operating Instructions
Preface, Contents
Introduction 1
Functions 2
Network Topologies with
OSM/ESM 3
Interfaces, Displays and
Operator Controls 4
Installation, Commissioning 5
Firmware Update 6
Technical Specifications 7
Further Support 8
Notes on the CE Mark 9
Glossary 10
Index 11
C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Release 4 2001/2002
Copyright Siemens AG 2001/2001, All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility or design, are reserved.
Disclaimer
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with
the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be
precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However,
the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary
corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcome.
5KGOGPU #)
$GTGKEJ #WVQOCVKUKGTWPIU WPF #PVTKGDUVGEJPKM
)GUEJ¼HVUIGDKGV +PFWUVTKG#WVQOCVKUKGTWPIUU[UVGOG
2QUVHCEJ & 0×TPDGTI
C79000-Z8976-C068-04
© Siemens AG 2001/2002
Subject to technical change.
5KGOGPU #MVKGPIGUGNNUEJCHV 2TKPVGF KP VJG (GFGTCN 4GRWDNKE QH )GTOCP[
Safety Guidelines
These operating instructions contain notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as
to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle
and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Danger
indicates that death, severe persona l injury or substantial prope rty damage will result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe persona l injury or substantial prope rty damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draw s your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part
of the documentation.
Qual i fi ed Per sonnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install a nd work on this equipment . Qualified persons are defined as
persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance
with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be use d for the applications de scribed in the ca talog or the technical
description, and only in co nnection with devices or components from o ther manufacturers which have been
approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is tra nsported, stored, se t up , and installed correctly , and
operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
SIMATIC® a nd SIM A TIC NET® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
Third parties using for their o wn purposes any other names in this document which refer to tradema rks might infringe
upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Preface
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 1
Preface
Purpose of the Operating Instructions
These Oper ati ng Instruc tions support you during c onfi gur ation, c omm issioning, and
troubleshooting in networks with OSM IT P 62, O S M IT P 62- LD, O S M IT P 53, ESM
IT P80, OSM TP62, and ESM TP80.
The Package
The O SM/ E S M i nc ludes the fol lowing c omponents:
OSM / ESM device
6-pin plug-in t er minal bloc k
Kit for wall mount ing or mounting i n 19" cubicle
Product informat ion bullet in
CD
Installing an OSM/ESM
Follow the i nst r uc tions in Chapt er 5 of these operat ing instr uc tions.
Validity of t he Operating Instru ctions
These operat ing instruc tions are val id for the fol lowing devices:
OSM ITP62
OSM ITP62-LD
OSM ITP53
ESM ITP80
OSM TP62
ESM TP80
Preface
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
2C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Further Documentation
The O SM/ E S M Network Management manual describes how to operate the
OSM/E S M wi th network management.
The " S IMA TIC NE T I ndustr ial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks" manual c ontains
further informat ion if you want to connec t t he OSM /ESM to ot her S IMA TI C NE T
network components (for exam ple OLM, E LM) or if you want to c onnec t ent ir e network
segments to an OS M /ES M .
The manual " Triaxial Networks f or Industrial Ethernet" c ontains instr uc tions on
creati ng triaxial networks that y ou c an c onnec t via an ELM to an O S M /ES M .
Finding Information
To help you to find the i nformation you requir e more qui c k ly , t he manual includes not
only the table of c ontent s but also the fol lowing sect ions i n the Appendix:
Glossary
Index
Guide to the Manual
To help you to find specific informat ion quic k ly, t hese operat ing instr uc tions inc lude
the following par ts:
At the front of the oper ating instructions you will find a complete table of contents.
The chapter s have headings in the left margi n with an overview of the content s of
the paragraphs in t he secti on.
Following t he appendix, you will find a Glossary in which the most important
specialist t er ms used in t he instr uc tions are defined.
At the bac k of the operating instruc tions, you will find an index wit h whic h y ou c an
find t opic s qui c k ly .
Audience
These Oper ati ng Instruc tions are i ntended for personnel involved i n c onfi gur ation,
commissioning, and troubleshooting in net works with OS M ITP62, O S M ITP62-LD,
OSM ITP53, ES M ITP 80, O S M TP62, and ES M TP80.
Preface
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 3
Personnel Qualific ation Requirements
Only qualified per sonnel should be allowed to i nstall and work on t his equi pment .
Qualified per sonnel as referred to i n the operating i nst r uc tions or in the warning notes
are defined as persons who are fam iliar with the installation, assembly, startup and
operation of this product and who possess the relevant qualific ations for t heir work,
e.g.:
Trai ning in or authoriz ati on for connec ting up, gr ounding or labeling cir c uits and
devic es or systems in accordanc e wi th current standar ds in saf ety technology;
Trai ning in or authoriz ati on for t he maintenance and use of sui tabl e safety
equipment in acc or danc e with cur r ent standards i n safety technology;
Fir st A id qualific ation.
Standa rds and Approvals
The O SM / E S M meets the requir ements for the CE mar k . F or more detailed
information about appr ovals and standards, refer t o the appendix.
Rec ycling and Disposal
OSMs/ESM s are sui tabl e for rec ycling due t o the l ow l evels of harmful substances
they contain
For envi r onmental ly-friendly recycling and di sposal of your old O SM/ESM, please
contact:
Siemens Akt iengesel lschaft
Anlagenbau und Tec hnische Dienstleistung
ATD E RC E ssen Recyli ng/Remar k eti ng
Fr onhauser Str. 69
45 127 Essen
Tel: +49-201- 816- 1540 ( Hotline)
Fax: +49-201-816-1506
Documentation Feedback
To help us to provide the best possibl e doc umentat ion for you and future OSM /ESM
users, we need y our support .
Preface
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
4C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Contents
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 5
Contents
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................7
1.1 Overvi ew of the Variants of the OSM/ESM.......................................................9
1.1.1 OSM ITP62...................................................................................................... 9
1.1.2 OSM ITP62-LD...............................................................................................11
1.1.3 OSM ITP53....................................................................................................13
1.1.4 ESM ITP80 .....................................................................................................14
1.1.5 OSM TP62.....................................................................................................15
1.1.6 ESM TP80 ......................................................................................................17
2 Functions..................................................................................................................19
3 Network Topologies with OSM/ESM........................................................................ 23
3.1 Bus Structure..................................................................................................24
3.2 Redundant Ring Struc ture ..............................................................................26
3.3 Redundant Coupling of Network Segments.....................................................28
3.4 Compatibility of OSM Version 2/ESM with OSM/ORM Version 1....................32
3.5 Coupling Network Segments...........................................................................36
4 Interf aces, Displ ays and Op erat or Control s............................................................39
4.1 ITP/TP Ports...................................................................................................40
4.1.1 ITP Ports........................................................................................................40
4.1.2 TP Ports.........................................................................................................41
4.1. 3 Proper ti es of the T P /I TP Por ts........................................................................42
4.1.4 FO Ports.........................................................................................................43
4.1. 5 Standby Sync P or t..........................................................................................44
4.1.6 Serial Interface...............................................................................................45
4.1. 7 Signal ing Contact/Terminal B lock for A tt ac hing the Power Suppl y..................46
4.2 Di spl ay s and Oper ator Controls......................................................................48
4.2.1 LED "Status"...................................................................................................48
4.2.2 LED "Power"...................................................................................................50
4.2.3 Port LEDs.......................................................................................................51
4.2.4 Operator Controls...........................................................................................53
5 Installation, Commissioning, Cleaning and Maintenance......................................55
5.1 Unpacking, Checki ng the Consi gnment ..........................................................56
5.2 Installation......................................................................................................57
5.3 Cleaning.........................................................................................................64
5.4 Maintenance...................................................................................................65
6 Firmware Update.......................................................................................................67
Contents
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
6C79000-Z8976-C068-04
7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................73
8 Further Support........................................................................................................79
9 Notes on the CE Mark...............................................................................................83
10 Glossary....................................................................................................................85
11 Index ..............................................................................................................................89
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 7
Introduction 1
The switc hing technology of the Industrial Ethernet OS M Versi on 2/ES M
(Optical/Electric al Swi tching Module) allows the struct ur ing of Ether net net works with
large spans and large numbers of nodes. It si mplifies network c onfiguration and
network expansions. The OS M Version 2/ES M ar e simply c alled O S M /ES M in the rest
of t his manual.
The O SMs have both electrical por ts and additional FO por ts via whic h several of
these devic es can be int er c onnected to form an opt ic al bus or ring confi gur ation.
ESM s onl y have electric al por ts.
DTEs, other O S Ms/ESM s or c omplete net work segm ents operating at 10 or 100 M bps
can be connec ted to the electrical auto-negoti ation (autosensing) ports of the
OSM/E S M . T he transmission rat e is detec ted automatically.
To increase availability, ring configurations can be created with OSMs or ESMs. To do
this, O S M s or E S M s are fir st c onnec ted t ogether to for m a bus (via ports 7 and 8) .
The t wo ends of the rings are closed by an OS M or ESM oper ating in t he RM
(redundanc y manager) mode.
The O SM or E S M operat ing in the RM mode monitors the att ac hed bus and al lows a
connecti on through it i f i t det ec ts an interr upti on on the at tached bus; in other words, i t
reestabli shes a funct ion bus. Rec onfi gur ation is com pleted wit hin 0.3s. An O SM/ E S M
is swit c hed over to t he RM mode using a DIP switc h on the device.
The r edundant standby coupling allows the redundant c oupling of OSM /ES M or OLM
rings. To do this, t wo OSM /ES M s (one operating in standby mode) ar e c onnected via
their standby sync por ts.
In t he IT P var iants of the OSM /ES M , the DTEs are at tached usi ng the particularly
robust I ndustr ial T wi sted P air (ITP) c onnec tor with it s hi gh immunity to noi se. In the
TP var iants, t he DTEs are connec ted vi a RJ - 45 female connectors.
The Version 2 O S Ms are compat ible with the previ ous OS M var iants (6GK 1105-
0AA00) and ORM (6GK1105- 1A A 00) and can, for example, be mixed with t hese i n an
optical r ing.
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
8C79000-Z8976-C068-04
This m anual describes the funct ions of t he OSM /ES M available wit hout using network
m anagement. The O S M /ES M Network Management user manual descr ibes the
additional opt ions available if you use network m anagement.
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 9
1.1 Overview of the Variants of the OSM/ESM
1.1.1 OSM ITP62
Possible Attachments
The O SM I TP62 allows attachment of up to 6 DT E s or net work segments using t he
IT P connector. By c oupling an O S M vi a por ts 7 and 8 it is possi ble to cr eate opt ic al
bus and ring str uc tures. The OSM I TP62 c an be c oupled with ot her OSM ITP 62, O S M
IT P53 and OS M TP62 modules vi a the optic al por ts.
Figur e 1: OSM ITP62
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
10 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Properties of the OSM ITP62
Elect r ic al por ts 6x 10/100 Mbps auto- negotiat ion por ts
with ITP c onnec tor ( sub-D 9-pin female)
Opt ic al por ts 2 x 100 M bps FO ports (full duplex)
BFOC fem ale c onnec tor
Maximum distanc e between two OSMs 3000 m ( multimode graded- index fi ber )
Maximum r ing span with 50 OSM s 150 km
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 11
1.1.2 OSM ITP62-LD
Possible Attachments
The O SM I TP62- LD is suit able for spanning extremely long distanc es. With t he
m onomode fiber, di st anc es of up t o 26 km are possible bet ween two OSM IT P 62- LD
m odules. B y coupl ing an OSM ITP62-LD via ports 7 and 8 it i s possibl e to create
optical bus and ring struc tures.
Figur e 2: OSM ITP62-LD
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
12 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Properties o f t he O S M ITP 62-LD
Elect r ic al por ts 6x 10/100 Mbps auto- negotiat ion por ts
with TP connec tor ( sub-D 9-pin femal e)
Opt ic al por ts 2 x 100 M bps FO ports (full duplex)
BFOC fem ale c onnec tor
Maximum distanc e between two
OSM ITP62- LD 26 km (monom ode fi ber )
Maximum r ing span with 50 OSM
ITP62-LD 1300 k m
OSM ITP62- LD modules can only be c oupled to other OSM IT P 62- LD modules by t he
optical por ts.
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 13
1.1.3 OSM ITP53
Possible Attachments
The O SM I TP53 allows the att ac hment of 5 DTEs or net work segments with the I TP
connector. B y coupl ing an OSM via ports 7 and 8 it is possibl e to cr eate opt ic al bus
and ring structures. The O S M IT P 53 c an be c oupled with ot her OSM ITP 53, O S M
IT P62 and OS M TP62 modules vi a the optic al por ts.
The addit ional FO por t of the O S M IT P 53 ( por t 1) also al lows redundant coupling of
rings via fiber -optic c ables (see Sect ion 3.3 ).
Figur e 3: OSM ITP53
Properties of the OSM ITP53
Elect r ic al por ts 5 x 10/100 Mbps auto- negotiat ion por ts
with ITP c onnec tor ( sub-D 9-pin female)
Opt ic al por ts 3 x 100 M bps FO ports (full duplex) B FOC
female c onnec tor
Maximum distanc e between two OSMs 3000 m ( multimode graded- index fi ber )
Maximum r ing span with 50 OSM s 150 km
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
14 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
1.1.4 ESM ITP80
Possible Attachments
Up to 8 DT E s or network segments wit h IT P c onnec tor c an be attac hed to an ES M
IT P80. B y c oupling an E S M via por ts 7 and 8 it is possible to cr eate bus and ri ng
structures.
Figur e 4: ESM ITP80
Properties of the ESM IT P80
Elect r ic al por ts 8x 10/100 Mbps auto- negotiat ion por ts
with ITP c onnec tor ( sub-D 9-pin female)
Opt ic al por ts none
Maximum distanc e between two ESMs 100 m
Maximum r ing span with 50 E S Ms 5 km
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 15
1.1.5 OSM TP62
Possible Attachments
The O SM T P 62 allows attachment of up to 6 DT E s or net work segment s using t he TP
connector. The O S M TP62 is part ic ularly sui ted for use in areas with low noise l evels
(for exam ple switc hing c ubic les). B y c oupling an O S M vi a por ts 7 and 8 it is possi ble
to create optical bus and ring structures. The O S M TP62 c an be c oupled with ot her
OSM TP 62, O S M IT P 53 and OSM ITP62 modules via the opt ical por ts.
Figur e 5: OSM TP62
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
16 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Properties o f t he O S M TP62
Elect r ic al por ts 6x 10/100 Mbps auto- negotiat ion por ts
with TP connec tor ( RJ -45 female)
Opt ic al por ts 2 x 100 M bps FO ports (full duplex)
BFOC fem ale c onnec tor
Maximum distanc e between two OSMs 3000 m ( multimode graded- index fi ber )
Maximum r ing span with 50 OSM s 150 km
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 17
1.1.6 ESM TP80
Possible Attachments
The ESM T P 80 allows attachment of up to 8 DT E s or net work segments using the TP
connector (RJ-45 fem ale) . T he E S M TP80 is partic ular ly sui ted for use in areas with
low noi se l evels (for exam ple switc hing c ubic les). B y c oupling an ES M TP80 via por ts
7 and 8 it is possible to creat e bus and ring struc tures.
Figur e 6: ESM TP80
Introduction
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
18 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Properties o f t he ES M TP80
Elect r ic al por ts 8x 10/100 Mbps auto- negotiat ion por ts
with TP connec tor ( RJ -45 female)
Opt ic al por ts none
Maximum distanc e between two ESM
IT P80 modules 100 m
Maximum r ing span with 50 E S M
IT P80 modules 5 km
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 19
Functions 2
This chapter discusses t he general funct ions of the OS M /ES M , in parti cul ar the
properti es of the switching t ec hnology .
Increased Network Performance
By filtering t he data t r affic based on the E thernet (M A C) addr ess of the DT E s, loc al
data t raffi c r emains l oc al, onl y data int ended for nodes in another network segment
are passed on by the OS M or E S M . T his reduces the data t r affic in the network
segments and lowers the network load in the network segments.
Simple Network Configuration and Network Ex pansion
OSMs and ESMs store t he data received at t he por ts and the direct it to the
desti nati on addr ess. T he r estr ic tion of the net work span result ing from co llision
detection (CS M A /CD) ends at the O S M /ESM port . Wit h multimode graded- index
fibers, a tot al net work span of up t o 150 k m and m or e can be achieved wit hout
problems. Wit h the O S M IT P 62- LD, t he monom ode fi ber s al low a network span of up
to 1300 km.
Limitation of Er r o r s to the Network Segment Affected
OSMs and ESMs only pass on v alid data. Invalid packets are di scarded so t hat bad
packets wit hin a network segment have no effect on any other segment att ac hed to
the O SM/ E S M .
Functions
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
20 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Lear ning Addresses
By evaluat ing the source addresses in the data pac k ets, O S M s/E S Ms automat ic ally
learn the addr esses of the DTE s attached via a par ti c ular por t. If an OSM /ES M
receives a data pack et, it di r ects this packet only to the por t via which the appropriate
DTE can be obtained.
An OS M/E S M can l ear n up to 12000 addresses.
Deleting Addresses
An OS M/E S M monitors the age of the addr esses it has lear nt - addr ess entries that
ex ceed a certain age (aging ti me on the O S M /ES M 40 seconds) are delet ed again by
the O SM/ E S M . I f a packet wit h a source addr ess matching the address entry is
received before the aging t ime elapses, the addr ess entry is ret ained and t he age of
the address is set to 0 again. When t he OSM /ES M is restarted, the address entries are
also deleted. I f a packet is recei ved by a OSM /ES M for which there is no address
entry, the O S M /ES M distr ibutes it to all ports.
Se tting the Tr ansmission Rate, Auto-negotiation
The electric al por ts of the O S M /ES M ar e set to t he auto-negotiation ( autosensing)
mode.
They automatically detect the transmission rat e ( 10 or 100 M bps) at whi c h the
att ached devi c e or att ac hed network segment operates and set themselves to this
rate. I f the par tner device also supports the aut o- negotiat ion mode, t he devices fur ther
negotiat e whether they will ex change data with each other in the hal f dupl ex or full
duplex m ode.
As a result of the aut omatic adaptat ion t o the t r ansmission rat e of the att ac hed DTEs,
ex isting network segments operating at 10 or 100 Mbps can be int er connect ed si mply
using O S M s/E S M s.
Note
If the partner device c onnected to a port of an OSM /ES M does not support the
auto-negotiat ion mode ( for example OSM Version 1) , t he por t of the partner
devic e must be set to half duplex mode.
Functions
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 21
Packets with the VLAN Priority Tag
Please note the fol lowing:
1. The OSM/ESM
does not support pac k ets wit h V LA N tags according to I E E E
802.1Q . Configur e y our network so that no pac k ets with VLA N tags are
transmit ted vi a the O S M /ES M .
2. Your network shoul d be desi gned so that no pack ets wit h a pr ior ity tag and a
priorit y higher t han 3 (I EEE 802.1p) are tr ansmi tted via the OSM/ ESM si nce t hese
packets can infl uenc e r edundanc y func tions (for exam ple, l onger swit c hover times
if a fault devel ops).
Functions
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
22 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 23
Network Topologies with OSM/ESM 3
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
24 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
3.1 Bus Structure
Wi th O S M s or ES M s, bus structures can be implemented . The cascading dept h and
tot al span of a network are limit ed only by the monit or ing ti mes of the comm unic ati on
connecti ons. These times must always be set higher than t he si gnal delay of the
transmission path.
OSM
ITP 62 OSM
ITP 62 OSM TP 62 OSM ITP 62
1 Fiber-optic cable (FO)
3 TP cord 9/RJ45
4 IT P standar d cab l e 9/15
PC S7-400 S7-300 S7-400
Figure 7: Bus with OSM
Apart fr om OSM IT P 62- LD modules, all listed O S M var iants can be used in any
combinat ion in a bus consisting of OSM s. OSM IT P 62- LD modules can only be
coupled with other OSM IT P 62- LD modules via the opt ic al por ts (monomode fiber ) .
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 25
2 ITP XP standard cable 9/9
3 TP cord 9/RJ45
4 ITP standard cable 9/15
2
2
2
2
3 4
4
4
PC S7-400 S7-400S7-300
ESM ESM
ITP 80
ESM ESM
ITP 80 ESM
Figur e 8: Bus with ESMs
In a bus consisting of ESMs, both ES M IT P 80 modules and ESM TP80 modules can
be used. (Connecti ng cabl e to couple the two vari ants available on request).
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
26 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
3.2 Redundant Ring Structure
Wi th t he aid of an OSM funct ioning as the r edundanc y manager (RM) , bot h ends of
an optical bus made up of OSM s can be closed to form a r edundant optic al r ing. The
OSMs are connect ed toget her usi ng ports 7 and 8.
The RM monitors the OSM bus connected to it, c loses the bus if it detects and
interr uption and t her efore reestablishes a func tioning bus configuration. A maximum
of 50 O S M s are per mitt ed in an opt ic al r ing. T his allows reconfiguration time of l ess
than 0. 3 s to be achi eved. T he RM mode is act ivated on the OSM usi ng a DIP switc h
(Sec ti on 4.2. 4.1).
OSM in
RM mode
OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM TP 62
OSM TP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62 OSM ITP 62
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Fiber-optic cable (FO)
OSM ITP 53
Figur e 9: Redundant Ring Struct ur e with O SMs
A redundant el ec tric al r ing can be est ablished using ESM s in the same way. T o
achieve this the E S M s are connec ted t ogether usi ng por ts 7 and 8. O ne device must
be switc hed to t he r edundanc y manager mode. Wit h ESMs and a maximum of 50
devic es i n the ring, a rec onfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can also be achi eved.
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 27
ESM in
RM mode
ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80
ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80 ESM ITP 80
ESM ITP 80
2 ITP XP standar d c abl e 9/9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Figur e 10: Redundant Ring Struct ur e with ESMs
Notes
• The reconfigur ation time of less than 0.3 s can onl y be ac hieved when no
component s other than O S M s and ESMs (for exam ple switc hes) are used i n the
redundant ri ng.
• In a ri ng, one device and one device only must oper ate in t he r edundanc y
m anager mode.
• DTEs or complet e network segments can be attached t o ports 1 - 6 of an
OSM/E S M oper ating in the RM mode.
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
28 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
3.3 Redundant Coupling of Network Segments
The standby sync por t all ows the connecti on of two Industrial E thernet OS Ms or ESMs
with one oper ati ng as standby master (DI P swit c h " S tby off" ) and the other as standby
slave (DI P swit c h " S tby on" ) . With this mode, pair s of O S Ms/ESM s can be used for
redundant coupl ing of OS M /ES M or OLM r ings.
Wi th net work management, the OS M/E S M can al so be configur ed so that several
rings or networks can be i nterc onnec ted at the sam e time with two OSM s/ E S M s (see
OSM/E S M Network Management, User Manual) .
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 29
1 Fibre-optic (FO)
2 ITP XP standard cable
1
Ring 1 (OSM ring)
Ring 3 (OLM ring)
Ring 2 (ESM ring)
1
1 1 1 11
1
111
11
1
1
2
2
111
1 1
1
1
2 2
2
ort 1
1
2
2
2
22
2
2
OSM in
RM-mode
OSM in
RM-mode
Standby-
master Standby-
master
Standby-
slave
Standby-
slave
Port 1
Port 1 Port 1
OSM ITP 62OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62SM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62
ESM ITP 80ESM ITP 80
ESM ITP 80ESM ITP 80
SM ITP 80
OLM
OLM
OLMOLM
OLM
OLM
OLMOLM
Figur e 11: Redundant Coupling of Network Segment s
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
30 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
The connection between two networ k segment s i s on two separate pat hs. Two of the
OSMs/ESM s in a ring are c onnec ted t ogether via a connec ting cable (IT P - XP standar d
cable 9/9 with a maximum length of 40 m) and i nform each other of their oper ating
states. One of these OSM s/E S M s i s assigned the r edundant func tion using the DIP
switc h setting "S tby on" ( standby slave). T he other OSM takes over t he funct ion of the
standby master (DIP swit c h setting "Stby off" ) .
Immediately following the failur e of the main transmission path, the standby sl ave
enables t he r edundant path. I f the main path is OK again, the standby master i nforms
the standby sl ave. The main path i s enabled and the r edundant pat h disabl ed again.
The r ec onfiguration time of the redundant ring coupling is less than 0. 3 s.
Port Assignment in the S tandby Mode
On t he st andby master and standby slave only port 1 (standby port ) c an be used for
the coupling to t he neighboring r ing. Por ts 2 - 6 can be used just as normal O SM
ports.
Wi th net work management, it is al so possibl e to configur e por ts other than port 1 as
standby ports (See al so OSM/ E S M Network Management User Manual)
Simultaneous Standby and Redunda ncy Ma nager O pera tion
A standby master or standby slave c an adopt t he funct ion of a redundancy manager at
the sam e time.
Replacing the S tandby Ma ster During Ope r ation
When replacing a standby master during operati on, t he fol lowing or der is necessary to
prevent an interr uption on the network:
1. Remove t he terminal block for the power supply on t he standby master
2. Remove t he si gnal lines and the standby c onnec ting cable from t he standby
master.
3. Connect the signal lines to t he st andby c onnec ting cable on t he r eplac ement
device.
4. Plug in t he terminal block for the power supply on t he r eplac ement devi ce.
When replacing a standby sl ave, no speci al measures are necessary.
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 31
Redunda nt Coupling of Rings over Fiber O ptic Cable with the OSM ITP5 3
The O SM I TP53 allows a redundant coupling of r ings with FO transmi ssion paths. This
allows rings far apar t from each to be connected.
OSM TP 62
OSM ITP 62 OSM TP 62
OSM ITP 62
OSM in
RM mode OSM ITP 62
OSM TP 62
OSM in
RM mode
OSM ITP 62
OSM ITP 62 OSM IT P 62
OSM ITP 53
OSM ITP 62
2
1
Fiber-opti c cable (FO)
2
ITP XP standard c abl e 9/ 9
S
tandby
m
aster
S
tandby
s
lave
Figur e 12: Redundant Coupling of Ri ngs wi t h O SM ITP 53
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
32 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
3.4 Compatibility of OSM Version 2/ESM with OSM/ORM Version
1
Compatibility
Versi on 2 OSMs can be oper ated at the sam e time in t he r ing with t he OSM ( 6GK
1105-0AA 00) and ORM ( 6GK 1105-1A A 00) here called OSM /ORM Version 1. Mak e
sure that only one devic e c an adopt t he r edundanc y manager function in t he r ing; i n
other words, only one ORM or only one OSM V er si on 2 operating in the RM mode.
ORM
OSM ITP 62
OSM
OSM ITP 62
1 Fiber-optic cable (FO)
OSM
Figur e 13: Ring with ORM as Redundancy Manager
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 33
1 Fiber-optic cabl e ( FO )
OSM ITP 62
OSM TP 62
OSM ITP 53
O
SM in
R
M mode
OSM
Figur e 14: Ring with OSM Ver s i on 2 as Redundancy Manager
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
34 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Redunda nt Coupling of Rings
In a redundant coupling of ri ngs, mak e sure that the standby master and standby slave
are either both of the t y pe OSM V er si on 1 or both of the t y pe OSM V er si on 2.
2
2
Port 1Port 1
OSM OSM OSM
OSMOSM
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
1 Fiber-optic cable (FO)
2 ITP XP standard cable 9/9
O
SM in
R
M mod e
R
ing with OSM
v
ersion 2
R
ing with OSM
v
ersion 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Port 2 Port 2
Port 1 Port 1
Standby
master
S
tandby
s
lave
Figur e 15: Redundant Ri ng Coupl ing wit h O SM V1 as Standby Master/Standby Slave
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 35
Po r t 1
OSM OSM OSM
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
1 Fiber-optic cable (FO)
2 ITP XP standard cable 9/9
O
SM in
R
M mode
R
ing with OSM
v
ersion 2
R
ing with
O
SM ve rsion 1
S
tandby
s
lave
Standby
master
2
2
P
ort 1
Po r t 1
P
ort 1
Figur e 16: Redundant Ri ng Coupl ing wit h O SM V2 as Standby Master/Standby Slave
Figure 16 also shows how an exi st ing ring with Ver si on 1 OSM s can be connec ted t o a
ring with V ersion 2 O S Ms.
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
36 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
3.5 Coupling Network Segments
A network segment can be connected t o eac h of the por ts of an OS M /ES M .
The Ethernet Planning Rules:
Sum of the delay equivalent s and cable lengt hs i n the worst-case path shorter than
4520 m .
Sum of the variability v alues in the worst-case path less than 50 bi t t imes
need only be maint ained as previ ousl y i n eac h individual segm ent (see al so "SIMA TI C
NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks" m anual) .
The coupling of network segm ents via OSM has fur ther advant ages:
The collision domain ends at the OSM por ts and the net work segm ents att ac hed to
them, t he per mitted tot al network span incr eases.
Only valid dat a pac k ets are passed on via O S M ports. Network segments with
problems cannot influence other network segments.
Data packets are only passed on to the ports to whic h the DT E with t he destination
address is connected. T he available transmission capac ity inc r eases sinc e the l ocal
data t raffi c of a network segm ent no longer put s l oad on another network segment.
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 37
OLM OLM
O
LM
O
LM
O
LM
OLM
O
LM
O
LM
E
LM
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
OSM
ITP 62
OSM in
RM mode
OSM
ITP 62
2
2
1
Fiber-optic cable (FO)
2
ITP XP standard cable 9/9
Figur e 17: Coupli ng Network Segments
Network Topologies with OS M /ES M
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
38 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 39
Interfaces, Displays and Operator Controls 4
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
40 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
4.1 ITP/TP Ports
This chapter descr ibes the pr oper ti es of IT P and the T P por ts.
4.1.1 ITP Ports
In t he IT P var iant of the O S M /ESM, the DT E s are at tached via sub-D female
connectors. T he casings of t he c onnec tors are electrically c onnec ted t o the casi ng of
the O SM. A scr ew loc k ing mec hanism holds the connec tors firmly in place.
RD + Pin 1
TD + Pin 5
P
in 6 RD -
P
in 7 n.c.
P
in 8 n.c.
P
in 9 TD -
n.c. Pin 2
n.c. Pin 3
n.c. Pin 4
Figur e 18: Pinout
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 41
4.1.2 TP Ports
Wi th t he OSM TP62 and ES M TP80, t he DTEs are at tached via RJ- 45 femal e
connectors.
P
in 1 RX +
P
in 2 RX -
P
in 3 TX +
P
in 4 n.c.
P
in 5 n.c.
P
in 6 TX -
P
in 7 n.c.
P
in 8 n.c.
Figur e 19: Pinout
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
42 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
4.1.3 Properties of the TP/ITP Ports
Link Control
OSMs/ESM s monit or the connec ted T P /ITP c able segment s for short-cir c uits or wire
breaks using regul ar link test pulses complying wit h t he 100BASE-TX standard.
OSMs/ESM s do not send dat a to a segment from which they ar e not receiving link test
pulses. An unused i nterface i s taken to be a wir e break sinc e the device without power
cannot send li nk test pulses.
Auto Polarity Ex cha nge
If the rec eive c able pair is i nc or r ec tly c onnec ted (RD+ and RD- swapped over) , the
polari ty is automatically r ever sed.
Auto-negotiation Mode
The TP/ IT P por ts of O S M /ESM are set t o the aut o- negotiat ion mode.
They automatically detect the transmission rat e ( 10 or 100 M bps) at whi c h the
att ached devi c e or att ac hed network segment operates and set themselves to this
rate. I f the par tner device also supports the aut o- negotiat ion mode, t he devices fur ther
negotiat e whether they will ex change data with each other in the hal f dupl ex or full
duplex m ode.
Note
If the partner device c onnected to a port of an OSM /ES M does not support the aut o-
negotiat ion mode (for exam ple OSM V er si on 1) , t he por t of the partner device must
be set to half duplex m ode.
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 43
4.1.4 FO Ports
The FO por ts have BFOC/ 2.5(ST) female connectors. They monitor the connected
cable for wire breaks com plying with t he IEEE 802.3 100 Base-FX standard. A break
on the F O cable is al ways signaled by the port status displ ay of both connec ted OS M s.
(Status LED of the port goes off) .
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
44 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
4.1.5 Standby Sync Port
A 9-pin fem ale c onnec tor is used to connect the IT P XP Standard Cable 9/9 for the
redundant st andby c oupling. The casi ng of the c onnec tor is el ec trically c onnec ted t o
the casing of the O S M /ESM.
A screw lock ing mec hanism holds the connec tors firmly in plac e.
Stby_In + Pin 1
Stby_Out + Pin 5
P
in 6 Stby_In -
P
in 7 n.c.
P
in 8 n.c.
P
in 9 Stby_Out -
n.c. Pin 2
n.c. Pin 3
n.c. Pin 4
Figur e 20: Pinout
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 45
4.1.6 Serial Interface
OSMs/ESM s have an RS-232 interface that is used for fi r mwar e updates.
P
in 5 SG
DSR Pin 6
P
in 1
P
in 4 DT R
P
in 2 RD
P
in 3 TD
RTS Pin 7
CTS Pin 8
Pin 9
Figur e 21: Pinout
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
46 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
4.1.7 Signaling Contact/Terminal Block for Attaching the Po wer Supply
The at tachment of the power supply and t he si gnaling c ontact i s made using a 6- pin
plug-i n terminal block wi th a screw lock ing mec hanism.
L1 +
F1
M
M
F2
L2 +
+
24V
+
24V
Figur e 22: Term inal Bl ock
Warning
Industrial Ethernet OSMs/ESMs are designed for operation with safety extra-
lo w vo ltage. This means t hat on ly safet y ext ra- lo w vo ltag es (SELV) comp lying
wi th IEC950/EN60950/ VDE0805 can b e connected to the power supply
terminals and the signaling contact.
The power supply unit to supply the OSM/ESM must comply with NEC Class 2
(voltage range 18 - 32 V, current requirement 1 A)
Th e sig nal ing co ntact can carry a l oad of maximu m 100 mA (safety ext ra- lo w
vol tage ( S E LV) , DC 24V) .
Power Supply
The power supply c an be c onnec ted redundantly. B oth input s are isolated. There is no
load distr ibution. With redundant power supply, the power supply unit with the higher
output voltage supplies the OSM/ES M alone. The power supply volt age is el ec tric ally
isolated from the casi ng.
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 47
Signaling Contact
The following is signaled vi a a fl oating signaling contact (r elay c ontact ) when contact
is brok en:
The f ailur e of a monitor ed power supply . Which power supply is monitored i s
specified in the fault mask (see Section 4.2.3).
The inc or r ec t li nk status of a monitored por t (in ot her words, t he por t i s not c or r ec tly
att ached or t her e are no l ink test pulses coming from t he par tner device) . T he por ts
to be monitored ar e sel ec ted using the fault mask.
When at least one por t is segment ed.
In the RM Mode (additional)
The inc or r ec t li nk status of por t 7 or por t 8 depending on the status of t he faul t
mask.
When a second OS M is swit c hed to t he RM mode in the sam e r ing.
OSM/ESM in Normal Mode and ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9 Plugged into the Sta ndby
Sync Port:
Short-c ir c uit ed IT P XP Standard Cable 9/9
Bad standby confi gur ation: The part ner devi c e c onnec ted via the IT P XP Standard
Cable 9/9 is not switched to standby.
If there is an i nc or r ect link status on a standby port .
OSM/ESM in the Standby Mode:
ITP XP Standard Cable 9/ 9 not plugged in, short -circ uited or br ok en
Bad standby confi gur ation: The part ner devi c e c onnec ted via the IT P XP Standard
Cable 9/9 is swi tched to standby.
If there is an i nc or r ect link status on a standby port .
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
48 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
4.2 Displays and Operator Controls
The O SM/ ESM has the fol lowing LE D displ ay s:
4.2.1 LED "Status"
The status display i ndic ates the operating mode of an OSM /ES M :
Fault (red LE D):
Status Meaning
Lit The OSM /ES M has detec ted an err or . T he si gnaling c ontact
opens at the same time. T he si gnaled er r or s are described in
Chapter 4.1. 7.
Not lit No er r or s detec ted by the OS M /ES M .
Stby – Sta ndby (gre en LED):
Status Meaning
Lit The standby func tion i s acti vated, the OS M/E S M is i n the
standby passive mode.
Not lit The standby function is deact ivat ed.
Flashes The standby function is act ivat ed, O S M /ES M is i n the standby
active mode; in other words, t he master OS M /ES M has failed
and the standby OSM/ES M takes over dat a traffic.
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 49
RM – Redundanc y Manager (green LE D)
Status Meaning
Lit The O SM/ E S M i s operat ing in the redundanc y manager mode.
The r ing is operating free of er rors in other words the redundanc y
m anager does not al low traffic through but monit or s t he r ing.
Note: One O S M must operate in the redundanc y manager mode
(and one only) in eac h OSM /ES M r ing.
Not lit The OSM /ESM i s not in the redundanc y manager mode.
Flashes The OS M/E S M is i n the redundanc y manager mode and has
detected a break on the ring. The OSM /ES M makes the
connecti on between it s two ring port s so that a funct ional bus
configur ation i s reestablished.
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
50 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
4.2.2 LED "Power"
The display mode of t he " P ower" LE D c an be switc hed over by br iefl y pr essing t he
"Select/ S et" butt on on the fr ont panel of the O S M /ES M . T he valid display mode is
indic ated by the t wo displ ay mode LEDs on the OS M /ES M .
Depending on the stat us of the t wo displ ay LE Ds, the "P ower" LED has t he two
following display modes:
Disp lay mo de Meanin g
Stat us of t he power supplie s
In the following states of the displ a y m ode
LEDs, the Power LEDs indicate the
current stat us of the two volt ages of the
OSM/ESM:
Display Mode
Power LED L1 or L2
- Li t gr een; i n other words, power supply 1 or
2 (l i ne 1 or l i ne 2) i s appli ed.
- Not l i t ; i n ot her words power supply 1 or 2
(l i ne 1 or line 2) is l ess than 14 V.
Fault Mask W i th the line 1 or 2 LEDs, the fault mask
indi cat es whether the power suppli es are
m onit or ed with the signal ing contact .
L1 or L2 LED
- Li t gr een; i n other words the corresponding
power suppl y ( li ne 1 or li ne 2) i s monitor ed.
If t he power suppl y fal l s below 14 V, t he
signal ing contact r esponds.
- Not l it, in other words the corresponding
power suppl y ( li ne 1 or li ne 2) i n not
m onit or ed. If t he power supply f al ls below
14 V this does not t r i gger the signal i ng
contact.
The fault mask can be set again wit h the
butt on on t he front panel of t he OSM/ESM
(see 4. 2. 4. 2)
The " S elec t/S et" butt on on the fr ont panel of the O S M /ES M c hanges the displ ay mode
of t he displ ay LE Ds. Usi ng this butt on, a new st atus can be programm ed for t he faul t
m ask ( see 4.2.4. 2)
LED off
L
ED off
LED off LED on
LED on LED on
Display
LED on
L
ED off
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 51
4.2.3 Port LEDs
The por t LEDs indic ate t he oper ating states of the indivi dual por ts of the OSM /ES M .
The display mode of t he por t LEDs can be changed usi ng the but ton on the front panel
of t he OSM /ES M allowing all operating states to be displ ay ed. T he c ur r ent display
m ode is signaled by the t wo displ ay mode LEDs.
Disp lay mo de Meanin g
Port St atus Port LED
- Not l it: No val id connection t o t he port ( f or
exampl e stati on turned off or cable not
connected)
- Li t gr een: Val i d connection
- Fl ashes green (once per peri od) : Port
switched to standby
- Fl ashes green (twi ce per period) : Port i s
segmented
- Fl ashes green (three times per period) : Por t
is turned off
- Fl ashes/li t yellow: Data r ecept ion on this
port
100 Mbps Por t LED
- Li t gr een: Por t operating at 100 Mbps
- Not l it : Por t operating at 10 Mbps
Full dupl ex Port LED
- Li t gr een: Por t operating i n f ull dupl ex mode
- Not l it : Por t operating i n hal f duplex mode
LED off
L
ED off
Display
LED off LED on
Display
LED on LED off
Display
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
52 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Disp lay mo de Meanin g
Fault mask The faul t mask indicates whether the ports
and the power suppl ies are monitor ed with t he
signal ing contact .
Port LED
- Li t gr een: Por t i s monit or ed; in ot her words,
if t he port does not have a valid connection
(for example cable not plugged in or
attached device turned off), the signaling
contact i s triggered.
- Not l it : The port is not monitored; in ot her
words, an i nval id or vali d connection at t he
port does not trigger the signal ing contact .
The fault mask can be set again wit h the
butt on on t he front panel of t he OSM (see
4.2.4.2)
The basi c status "Port Status" of the display is adopted automati c ally after turning on
the device. T he device also swit c hes automatically to t his display stat us when the
"Select/ S et" butt on is pressed for more than a minute.
LED on LED on
Display
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 53
4.2.4 Operator Controls
4.2. 4.1 Tw o-P in DIP Swi t ch
Wi th t he two-pin DIP switc hes on the upper c asi ng of the OSM /ES M y ou c an do the
following:
With the
Stby butt on, you c an toggle t he standby funct ion on and off.
With the
RM swit c h, you can activate the r edundanc y manager funct ion.
5VD[
4/
QHH QP
Figur e 23: DIP Swit ches
Interf ac es, Dis play s and Operator Controls
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
54 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
4.2. 4.2 "Select/ Set" Button
The " S elec t/S et" butt on on the fr ont panel of the O S M /ES M has the fol lowing
functions:
Pressing the butt on br iefl y moves on the displ ay of the por t LEDs (display mode).
The current displ ay mode is i ndic ated by the display mode LEDs.
If the display is i n the port status (both di splay mode LE Ds off) and if the button is
pressed for three seconds, t he displ ay mode LE Ds begin to fl ash. If you then
continue to press the button for a fur ther two seconds, the OS M /ES M is reset.
When i t is reset, all t he settings of t he OSM/ES M ar e set to t heir defaul ts (as set i n the
factory ) . T his al lows you to cancel setti ngs made, for example, wit h Web-Based
Management ( WBM) ( see al so OS M /ES M Network Management, User M anual).
If the display is i n the fault mask stat us and you press the button for two sec onds,
the display LE Ds start to fl ash. If you then pr ess the button for a fur ther t wo
seconds, the cur r ent stat us of t he ports and the suppl y vol tages are enter ed in the
fault mask. This means, i f, for example, t he por ts 1, 5, 6 had a valid connec tion (in
other words the port stat us di spl ay s of these ports are lit gr een or yellow) and if
power supply 1 was active at the point when the values wer e entered in the fault
m ask, port s 1, 5, 6 and power supply 1 will then be monit or ed.
Note
If the "S elec t/ S et" butt on is pressed whi le the devi c e is start ing up ( takes
approximatel y 20 seconds) after turning on the OS M /ES M , t he OSM /ESM changes to
the load fir mwar e status (both displ ay mode LEDs f lash simult aneousl y ) . T his status
is exit ed by pr essing t he butt on again. F or furt her informat ion on loading t he
firmware, r efer t o Chapter 6.
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 55
Installation, Commissioning, Cleaning and
Maintenance 5
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
56 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
5.1 Unpacking, Checking the Consignment
1. Check that t he c onsi gnment includes the following c omponents:
– OSM/ESM device
– Mounting angles, screws and terminal bloc k
– CD (inc ludes the manuals) and produc t infor mation bull etin
2. Check each component for any damage.
Warning
Do not install damaged components!
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 57
5.2 Installation
OSMs/ESM s can be installed in sever al ways:
Installat ion on a 35 mm standar d r ail
Installat ion on a S IMA TIC S 7-300 rail
Installat ion in pair s i n a 19" c ubic le
Wall mounted
Note
Rem ember that t he OSM /ES M must only be installed hor izontally ( vent ilation slit s
top/ bott om see Figur e 25) . T o ensure adequat e c onvec tion, there must be a
clearance of at least 5 c m above and below the vent ilat ion sl its. You shoul d also
m ake sure that the permitt ed ambient t emperatur e is not exc eeded.
Preparations
1. Before i nstalling, check whether the switch set ti ng of the DIP switc hes i s correct for
your application (see Secti on 4.2. 4.1)
2. Remove t he terminal block fr om the O S M and wir e up the powers supply and
signal l ines as desc r ibed in S ec tion 4.1.7.
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
58 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Standard Rail Mounting
1. Install the OS M/E S M on a 35 mm standar d r ail c omply ing with DIN E N 50022.
2. Fit t he OSM /ESM on to t he r ail from above and press in t he bott om of the devic e
until t he c atch engages.
3. Fit t he elec trical and optical connec ting cables, t he terminal block for t he power
supply and, i f necessary, t he st andar d c able 9/9 to the standby sync por t.
Figur e 24: Inst all i ng the OSM on a DIN Standard Rail
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 59
Removing from a Sta ndard Rail
1. To r emove the O S M /ES M from the standard rail, pull the device down and then
pull the bot tom away from the standard r ail.
Figur e 25. Removi ng f r om the Standard Rail
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
60 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 Rail
1. F ir st secur e the two supplied angl es on both sides of the O S M /ES M .
2. F it t he guide on the top of the OSM c asi ng into the S 7 rai l.
3. Sec ure the OSM /ES M with t he suppl ied screws to the lower part of the r ail.
Figur e 26: Inst all at ion on the S7-300 Rail
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 61
Installation in Pairs in the 19" Cubicle
To install in pai rs in t he 19" cubicle, you r equir e the two securi ng angles supplied.
1. F ir st scr ew the t wo OSM s/E S M s t ogether using the supplied holding plat e on the
rear.
2. F it t wo of t he suppl ied angles to t he sides
3. Sec ure the two devices using the angl es in the 19" cubicle. Please note t hat t he
OSM/E S M must be grounded wit h a low resistance via t he two holding angles.
Figur e 27: Inst all at i on in t he 19" Cubicl e
Int erconnecting t he devices at the rear
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
62 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Wall Mounting
To install an O S M /ES M on a wall, follow the steps below:
1. F it t he suppl ied mounting angles on the sides.
2. Sec ure the devic e to the wal l using the angles.
3. Connect t he devic e to prot ec tive earth with a low-resi stanc e c onnec tion vi a one of
the angles.
Figur e 28: Wall Mounti ng
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 63
The following table shows how to m ount t he device on different t y pes of walls:
Wall Mounting
Concrete wall Use f our wal l plugs 6 m m in diameter and 30 mm
long. (dr ill hole 6 m m in diameter, 45 mm deep). Use
screws 4. 5 mm in diameter and 40 mm long.
Metal wall
(min. 2 mm thick) Use screws 4 mm in diameter and at least 15 mm
long.
Sandwich type plaster wall
(min. 15 mm thick) Use an anchoring plug wit h at least
4 m m diameter.
Note
The module must be secured to t he wall so that t he mounting can c ar r y at least four
times the weight of the module.
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
64 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
5.3 Cleaning
If you need to c lean the O S M /ES M , use a dry clot h only .
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 65
5.4 Maintenance
If a fault develops, please send the module to y our SIE M E NS service depar tment for
repair. The devices are not desi gned for repair on si te.
Installat ion, Comm is s i oning, Cleaning and Maint enanc e
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
66 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 67
Firmware Update 6
Wi th t he OSM /ESM i t is possible to update t he fi r mwar e via t he serial port.
Informat ion on firmware updates for OSM /ESM is avai lable on t he Int er net at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/net.
To download the fir mware you r equir e a P C with Windows 95/98/ NT and t he
Hyperterminal pr ogr am available under A c cessor ies. The download is ex plained below
based on the di alogs displayed in Hyper terminal.
Fir m war e Update
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
68 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Preparations
Connect the seri al por t of your PC and the OSM/ E S M wi th a normal null modem cabl e
. Depending on t he por t of the PC that you are using, you r equir e a c able with a 9-pin
or 25-pin sub-D female c onnec tor for t he P C end, and a 9-pin fem ale c onnec tor for the
OSM/E S M end.
The following table shows the pinout and the connec tions for bot h types of c able:
PC port 25-pin
Female
9-pin
Female
connected
to OSM port 9- pin
Female
Si gnal Name Pin Pin Pi n Signal name
TD (Transmi t Data) 2 3 2 RD
RD (Receive Data) 3 2 3 TD
RTS (Request To
Send) 47 8CTS
CTS (Cl ear To Send) 5 8 7 RT S
SG (Signal G r ound) 7 5 5 SG
DSR (Dat a S et Ready) 6 6 4 DTR
DTR (D ata Ter minal
Ready) 20 4 6 DSR
Fir m war e Update
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 69
Follow the steps outl ined below in Hy per terminal:
1. Set up a new connection ( for example with F ile -> New).
2. Set t he fol lowing pr oper ties for t he c onnec tion as shown i n the dialog bel ow:
3. Reset the OSM/ES M . Pr ess the Select/ S et button during oper ation, if necessary
several times until the displ ay LE Ds i ndic ate t he por t stat us (bot h displ ay LE Ds
off). Then press the Select/S et but ton for at least 6 seconds. The displ ay LE Ds
begin to flash after approximately 3 seconds, 2 seconds lat er the O S M /ES M is
reset. ( A ll LEDs go on briefly and then off agai n) .
Fir m war e Update
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
70 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
The following message t hen appear s i n the Hyper terminal window:
4. Press the "S elec t/ S et" button again br iefl y
5. T hen confir m the prompt: " Do y ou real ly want t o update your fi r mwar e? Y /N" with
Y.
Fir m war e Update
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 71
The following message is then display ed.
6. Now select the func tion Tr ansfer > Send File func tion in the Hy per terminal
window.
7. I n the next dial og window, enter t he fi le to be downloaded and selec t "Xmodem"
as the prot oc ol. Star t t he transfer of the fir mwar e with t he " S end" button.
Fir m war e Update
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
72 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
The following dialog then appears displaying t he pr ogr ess of the download.
Downloadi ng c an take up to 10 minut es. A fter y ou have downloaded the fir mware
successfully , t he device is automatically star ted wit h the new f ir mwar e. Please note
the versi on of the new firmware on a label on the side labeling panel of the
OSM/ESM.
Note
During the download, do not interr upt the c onnection between the PC and O S M /ES M
or turn off the power supply to t he OSM/ES M . I f the firmware coul d not be
downloaded complet ely to t he OSM due to a power failure, the message "Firmwar e in
flash is fault y " appears aft er the device star ts up. T his m eans t hat the fi r mwar e must
be downloaded agai n.
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 73
Technical Specifications 7
Technic al S pec ifications
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
74 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Ports
Attachment of DTEs or net work
segments twisted pair/ Industrial
Twisted Pair
6 x 9-pi n sub-D fem ale c onnec tor with
OSM ITP62, OSM ITP62-LD
5 x 9-pi n sub-D fem ale c onnec tor with
OSM ITP53
8 x 9-pi n sub-D fem ale c onnec tor with
ESM ITP80
6 x RJ-45 fem ale c onnec tor with OS M
TP62
8 x RJ-45 fem ale c onnec tor with ESM
TP80
All elec tric al ports support 10/100 M bps
auto-negotiation
Standby sync port for redundant
coupli ng of rings 1 x 9- pin sub-D fem ale c onnec tor
Attachment of furt her OSM s and DTE s
via FO 2 x 2 BFOC female connectors with OSM
ITP 62, OSM ITP62-LD, OSM TP62
3 x 2 BFOC fem ale connector s wit h OSM
ITP 53
(100 Mbps, 100B aseFX, ful l duplex)
Connector for power supply and
signali ng c ontact 1 x 6-pi n plug in terminal block
Power supply
(redundant i nputs isol ated) 2 DC 24V i nfeeds (DC 18 to 32 V)
Safety extra- low voltage (S E LV )
Power loss at 24 V DC 20 W
Load on the si gnaling contact DC 24 V / max . 100 mA safet y extra- low
voltage (S E LV )
Current consum ption at r ated vol tage 1000 m A
Overc ur rent pr otection at input Non-replac eable fuse (1.6 A / 250 V /
slow)
Technic al S pec ifications
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 75
Permitted Cable Lengths
FO cabl e length bet ween two OSMs For OS M IT P 62, O S M IT P 53, O S M TP62:
0-3000 m (62.5/ 125 µm glass f iber ; 1
dB/km at 1300 nm; 600 MHz *k m; 6 dB
m ax. permitt ed optical power loss wit h 3
dB li nk power margin)
0-300 m (50/125 µm glass fiber ; 1 dB/km
at 1300 nm; 600 MHz *k m; 6 dB max .
permit ted opt ical power l oss wit h 3 dB link
power mar gin)
For OSM IT P 62- LD
0-26000 m (10/125 µm monomode fi ber ;
0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm; 13 dB max. per-
m itt ed optical power loss wit h 2 dB link
power mar gin)
IT P cable lengt h 0-100 m
TP cabl e length 0-10 m with TP cord
Up to 100 m tot al lengt h when using
structured cabling
Length of the I TP XP Standard Cable
9/9 at st andby sync por t 0-40 m
Cascadi ng Depth
Bus/star str uc ture Any (only depending on si gnal
propagation time)
Redundant ring 50 ( for rec onfi gur ation t ime < 0. 3 s)
Technic al S pec ifications
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
76 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Switching Properties of OSM/ESM
Num ber of lear nable addr esses Up to 12000
Aging time 40s (Def ault )
Latency 4 µs (measured at 75% load bet ween two
ports operati ng at 100 Mbps)
Swit c hing pr oc edur e Stor e and forward
Permitted Ambient Conditions/EMC
Operating t emperatur e 0°C to +60°C (ex c eption: OSM IT P 62- LD
with 0°C to 55°C)
Storage/transport temper ature -40°C to +80°C
Relative humidit y in operation ‹ 95% (no condensation)
Operating alt it ude Max. 2000 m
Noise emission EN 55081 Class A
Noise immunit y EN 50082-2
Laserprotec ti on Cl ass 1 com ply with I E C 60825- 1
Mech anical Desi gn
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 217 x 136.5 x 69
Wei ght in g 1400
Installat ion opti ons St andard rail
S7-300 r ail
Wal l mounted
Installat ion in 19" c ubic le
Only horizontal installation permitted
(ventilation slits top/bottom)
Degree of pr otection IP 20
Technic al S pec ifications
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 77
Consignment / Order Numbers
Consignment - S IMA TIC NE T I ndustr ial
Ethernet OSM /ES M inc luding
terminal bloc k for power supply
- Fitt ings for 19" cubicle
inst allat ion/wall mount ing
- 6-pin plug in terminal bl oc k
- Operating Instructions
- Reply form
Order numbers:
Industr ial Ethernet OSM
IT P 62 Industr ial E thernet OS M IT P 62- LD
Industr ial Ethernet OSM I TP 53
Industr ial Ethernet ESM ITP 80
Industr ial Ethernet OSM T P 62
Industr ial Ethernet ESM TP 80
6GK1105-2AA00
6GK1105-2AC00
6GK1105-2AD00
6GK1105-3AA00
6GK1105-2AB00
6GK1105-3AB00
Accessories
Industr ial T wisted P air and Fiber Optic
Networks Manual 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Tr iaxial net works for Industrial E thernet
manual 6GK1970-1AA20-0AA0
Technic al S pec ifications
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
78 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 79
Further Support 8
Fur ther Suppor t
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
80 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Further S upport
If you have other questions on SI M A TI C NE T products, please contac t your loc al
Siemens off ice or representative. You will find the addresses i n the SIMA TIC NE T
Catalog IKPI or on the Internet at http:/ /www.ad.s ieme ns.d e/net.
SIMATIC Custome r Support Hotline
Avai lable at al l times worldwide:
5+/#6+% $CUKE *QVNKPG
Nuremberg
SIMATIC BASIC Hotline SIMATIC Premium Hotline
(char ged, onl y wi th SI M A TI C c ar d)
Local time: Mo to Fr 8:00 to 18: 00 ( CE T)
Phone: +49 ( 0) 180- 5050 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223
E-mail: mailto:techsupport@ad.siemens.de
Local time: Mo to Fr 0:00 to 24: 00 ( CE T)
Phone: +49 ( 911) - 895- 7777
Fax: +49 (911) - 895- 7001
Johnson City
SIM ATI C BASIC Hotl in e Singapore
SIM ATI C BASIC Hotl in e
Local time: Mo to Fr 8:00 to 17: 00
Phone: +1 423 461- 2522
Fax: +1 423 461-2231
E-mail: simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com
Local time: Mo to Fr 8:30 to 17: 30
Phone: +65 740- 7000
Fax: +65 740-7376
E-Mail:simatic.hotline@sae.siemens.com.sg
Johnson City Nuremberg
Singapore
Fur ther Suppor t
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 81
SIMATIC Customer Support Online Services
In it s onl ine services, S IMATI C Customer Support provides you with wide-ranging
additional infor mation about S IMA TI C pr oduc ts:
These servic es are available on the Int er net at :
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi
SIMATIC Training Center
To help you to become familiar with working with SIMATIC S7 PLCs, we off er a range
of cour ses. Please contac t your r egional training center or the central t r aining c enter in
D-90327 Nurember g, T el. + 49- 911- 895- 3154.
Fur ther Suppor t
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
82 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 83
Notes on the CE Mark 9
Product name:
SIM A TI C NE T OSM IT P 62 6GK 1105-2A A 00
OSM ITP 62- LD 6G K 1105- 2A C00
OSM ITP 53 6GK 1105-2A D00
ESM ITP 80 6GK 1105- 3A A 00
OSM TP 62 6GK 1105-2A B 00
ESM TP 80 6GK 1105-3AB 00
The SIMA TI C NE T produc ts listed above meet the r equir ements of t he following E U
directives:
EMC Dir ec tive
Direct ive 89/336/E E C “E lec tromagnetic Compatibility"
Area of Application
The pr oduc ts are designed for use in an i ndustr ial environment:
Requirements
Area of Appl ication
Emitted Noise Noise immunity
Industr y EN 50081-2 : 1993 EN 50082-2 : 1995
Notes on the CE M ar k
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
84 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Adherence to Installa tion Instructions
The pr oduc ts meet t he r equir ements if you adhere to t he installat ion and safet y
inst r uc tions contained in t his document ation (Description and Oper ating I nstr uc tions
for Industrial Ethernet O S M /ES M ( V er si on 2) ) and i n the following doc umentat ion
during i nstallation and operat ion:
SIMATIC NE T I ndustr ial Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks Manual
SIMATIC NE T T r iaxial Networks for Industr ial E thernet
Dec lar ation of Conformity
The EU dec laration of confor mity is available for the r esponsible aut hor ities according
to t he above- mentioned EU dir ec tive at the following addr ess:
Siemens Akt iengesel lschaft
Bereich A utomati sierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Industr ielle Kommunik ation (A & D P T2)
Postfac h 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
Notes for the Manufacturers of Machines
This product is not a machi ne in the sense of the EU direc tive on machines. There is
therefore no declar ation of c onformit y for the EU directive on mac hines 89/392/EE C.
If the produc t is part of the equipment of a machi ne, it must be inc luded in the
procedur e for obtaining the declaration of c onformity by the manufact ur e of the
machine.
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 85
Glossary 10
Auto Po l arity
Exchange Proc edur e in whic h the module aut omatically detects inc or r ec t at tachment
of a cable to the elec tric al O S M/E S M por t (RD+ and RD- swapped over) .
The O SM t hen r ever ses the pol ari ty automat ic ally .
Auto-Negotiation Procedure standardized by IEEE 802.3 in which the transm ission
paramet er s (for example 10/ 100 Mbps, full/ half dupl ex) are negot iated
automatically between the devi c es.
Autosensing See A uto-Negotiation
Backbone In conj unc tion wit h the O S M /ES M , this means a bus or ring struct ur e
m ade up of i nterc onnec ted O S M or E S M modules that form the backbone
of an industrial LAN.
Disp lay Mod e The two display mode LEDs indicate t he displ ay mode of the P or t and
Power LEDs of the OS M/E S M . T he displ ay mode can be changed wit h the
butt on on the front panel of the O S M.
ESM El ectr ic al S witching Module. SIMATI C NE T Ethernet swit c h with electrical
ports
Fault Mask See fault mask
Fault Mask The faul t mask specifi es which por ts (port s 1 - 8) and power supply
terminals (line 1/ 2) ar e monitored by the signaling contact. The fault mask
can be set again with the but ton on t he front panel of the O S M /ES M .
Filtering OS Ms/ESM s learn t he addresses of the devi c es t hat can be acc essed via
a port. T hey r edir ec t t he pac k ets intended for this devic e only via t his port .
Glossary
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
86 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
ITP Port Por t wit h Industrial T wi sted P air (ITP) c onnec tor ( sub D 9-pin female)
Latency The l atency specifies the taken for packets to pass through the
OSM/E S M . I t is assumed t hat a rec eived pac k et can be sent on
imm ediately. The lat enc y does not inc lude the time necessar y for t he
OSM/ESM to receive a packet.
Link Control O S Ms/ESM s monit or the connec ted T P /ITP c able segment s for short -
circuits or wire break s using r egular link test pulses complying with t he
100BASE-TX standard. OS Ms/ESMs do not send data to a segment from
which t hey ar e not rec eiving link t est pulses. An unused interface is taken
to be a wir e br eak si nc e the device without power cannot send li nk test
pulses.
OSM Optic al S witching Module. SIMA TIC NE T Ethernet swit c h with opt ic al and
electr ic al por ts
Reconfiguration Time Time r equir ed by the O S M /ES M oper ating in the r edundancy manager
(RM) or standby mode to reestablish a functioning configur ation if a
devic e fai ls or t he c able is i nterrupted.
Redundancy Manager
(RM) Mode of an O S M or ESM for forming a redundant r ing str uc ture. T he RM
m onitors the OSM or E S M bus connected t o it, cl oses the bus if it det ec ts
and interr uption. This reestablishes a f unc tioning bus configuration.
One and only one devic e c an oper ate in the RM mode in ever y OSM or
ESM ring.
Signaling Contact F loating relay c ontact via which the error st ates detect ed by the
OSM/E S M c an be signal ed.
Standby Sync Port Por t of an OSM /ES M via whic h the two OS M s or ES M s are connec ted in
a redundant coupl ing to infor m each other of their oper ati ng st ates.
Store and forward In this swi tching method used on the O S M /ES M , the complet e pac k et is
read in befor e it i s passed on by the swit c h. A packet is onl y passed on if it
is error-free.
Glossary
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 87
TP Port Port wit h a TP connector ( RJ-45 fem ale)
Glossary
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
88 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
C79000-Z8976-C068-04 89
Index 11
A
Accessories............................................71
Ambient c onditi ons, per mitt ed................70
Auto polar ity exc hange...........................36
Auto-negotiation.....................................16
Autosensing...........................................16
B
Bus structure..........................................18
Button....................................................48
C
Cable lengths, permitted ........................69
Cascading depth....................................69
Consignment..........................................71
D
Deleting addresses.................................16
Design, mec hanic al................................70
DIP switch..............................................47
Displays.................................................42
E
Error containment ..................................15
ESM ITP80............................................11
ESM TP80.............................................13
F
Fault mask......................................44, 46
Filtering..................................................15
Firmwar e update....................................61
FO ports.................................................37
H
Hotline...................................................74
Hyperterm i nal program ..........................63
I
Installation in cubicle..............................55
Installat ion, S7-300 rai l...........................54
Interfaces..........................................1, 33
ITP port..................................................34
L
Learning addresses................................15
Link control ............................................36
Link Control............................................36
M
Mounting, standard r ail...........................52
N
Network segment...................................30
Network topologies..........................1, 17
Null modem c able..................................62
O
Operator controls...................................47
OSM ITP53............................................10
OSM ITP62..............................................8
OSM ITP62-LD ........................................9
OSM TP62.............................................12
P
Power supply .........................................40
R
Reconfiguration time..............................20
Redundancy manager............................20
Redundant ring str uctur e........................20
S
Serial i nterface.......................................39
Signaling contact....................................41
Standby master......................................24
Index
Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
90 C79000-Z8976-C068-04
Standby slave........................................24
Standby sync port ..................................38
T
Technical specifications.........................67
TP port...................................................35
Traini ng center.......................................75
W
Wal l mounting........................................56
T
Glossary-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Glossary
10BASE2 Standard for 10 Mbps Ethernet transmission on thin coaxial cables (Cheapernet);
maximum segment length 185 Meters
10BASE5 Standard for 10 Mbps Ethernet transmission on coaxial cables (Yellow Cable);
maximum segment length 500 Meters
10BASE-FL Standard for 10 Mbps Ethernet transmission on glass fiber-optic cables (Fiber
Link)
10BASE-T Standard for 10 Mbps Ethernet transmission on Twisted Pair cables
100BASE-T Fast Ethernet Standard (100 Mbps) for data transmission on Twisted Pair cables
100BASEF-FL
Fast Ethernet Standard for data transmission on glass fiber-optic cables
Autonegotiation
Configuration protocol in Fast Ethernet
Devices on the network negotiate a transmission mode that each device is capa-
ble of using (100 Mbps or 10 Mbps; Full Duplex or Half Duplex) prior to the ac-
tual data transfer.
Autosensing
Capability of a device to detect the data rate (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps)
automatically and to send/receive at this rate.
Glossary
Glossary-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Backbone The network at the highest level of a hierarchically structured plant network.
Bandwidth length product (FO)
Measure of the capability of a fiber-optic cable to transfer at high data rates.
Bridge A network component that interconnects network segments. This ensures that
local data traffic remains local, in other words only data packets for a node in the
other segment are forwarded through the bridge. Errors in a network segment
are restricted to the original network segment. In contrast to switches, bridges
can only forward one data stream at any one time.
Burst Temporarily increased network load due to data burst or a sudden flurry of
signals
Bus Common transmission path on which all nodes are connected; it has two defined
ends.
In Industrial Ethernet, the bus takes the form of a segment with triaxial cable and
transceivers.
Bus segment
³ Segment
Bus system
All stations that are physically connected via a bus cable form a bus system.
Category x component
Cabling components are divided into various categories based on their
transmission characteristics. Each of the categories has different physical limit
values (for example maximum signal attenuation at a defined transmission
frequency).
Category 3: Data transmission up to 16 MHz
Category 4: Data transmission up to 20 MHz
Category 5: Data transmission up to 100 MHz
Category 6: Data transmission up to 200 MHz
ITP standard cable and TP cord are category 5 components and suitable for
transmission rates of 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps.
Glossary
Glossary-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Chassis ground
Chassis ground includes all the interconnected inactive parts of equipment that
must not have a hazardous voltage even in the event of a fault.
Collision domain
To ensure that the CSMA/CD protocol functions correctly, the propagation time of
a data packet from one node to another is restricted.
This propagation time results in a specially limited span for the network
depending on the data rate known as the collision domain. In 10 Mbps Ethernet,
this is 4520 m and in Fast Ethernet it is 412 m.
Several collision domains can be connected together using bridges/switches.
CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection
Ethernet medium access procedure
D.C. loop resistance
Total resistance of the outward and return line of a cable.
Delay equivalent
The delay equivalent describes the signal delay of a network component in the
signal path. The value of the signal delay is specified in meters instead of
seconds.
The value in meters corresponds to the distance that a signal could propagate
within the time if the signal propagated through a cable rather than passing
through the component.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) deals with all questions of electrical,
magnetic and electromagnetic emission and immunity and the functional
disturbances in electrical devices resulting from these effects.
FDX –> Full duplex
Fiber-optic cable (FO)
A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium in an optical network. Only
multimode glass fiber-optic cables are suitable for connecting optical Industrial
Ethernet components.
Glossary
Glossary-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Filtering A switch filters data traffic based on source and destination addresses in a data
packet. A data packet is passed on by the switch only to the port to which the
addressee is connected.
FO See fiber-optic cable
Full duplex Capability of a device to transmit and receive data simultaneously. In the Full
Duplex mode, collision detection is deactivated.
Ground Ground is the conductive ground area whose potential at any point can be taken
as zero.
GroundingGrounding means connecting a conductive part to ground via a grounding sy-
stem.
Half duplex A device can either receive or transmit data at any one time.
HDX –> Half duplex
Hub Active network component with repeater functionality, synonym for star coupler
IEEE 802 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
LAN/MAN Standards Committee
IEEE 802.3 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Ethernet working group
Glossary
Glossary-5
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
IEEE 802.3uInstitute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Fast Ethernet working group
IP 20 Degree of protection complying with DIN 40050: Protection against touching with
fingers and against the penetration of solid foreign bodies with more than 12 mm
∅.
ITP Industrial Twisted Pair; bus system based on the Twisted Pair standards IEEE
802.3i: 10BASE-T and IEEE 802.3j: 100BASE-TX for industrial application.
ITP standard cable
A twisted pair cable for industrial application complying with Category 5 with a
particularly dense shield.
Load containment
Due to its filtering function, a bridge or switch ensures that local data traffic
remains local. The local network load of a segment is contained in the originating
segment and does not represent extra load on the remainder of the network.
Link Class The link class describes the quality of a complete link from the active component
to the DTE (patch cord, patch panel, installation cable, telecommunication outlet,
connecting cable). This link must meet the value specified in the structured
cabling standard ISO/IEC 1180.
In contrast to this, there is also the specification regarding ”categories”, where
only requirements of products are defined, for example cable according to
Category 5. The suitable interaction of components of a link is ignored.
MAN Metropolitan Area Network
Data network with the geographical span of a city or town
Medium redundancy
Redundancy in the network infrastructure (cables and active components such
as OLMs or OSMs/ORM)
NIC Network interface card
Glossary
Glossary-6 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
OLM Optical Link Module
Industrial Ethernet network component with repeater functionality
Optical power budget (FO)
This is available between a sender and receiver on a fiber-optic link. It indicates
the difference between the optical power coupled in to a particular fiber by the
optical transmitter and the input power required by an optical receiver for reliable
signal detection.
Optical power loss (FO)
The optical power loss is the cumulative value of all the losses occurring in the
fiber-optic transmission path. These are due mainly to the attenuation of the fiber
itself and the splices and couplings. The optical power loss must be less than the
optical power budget available between the transmitter and receiver.
ORM Optical Redundancy Manager
Controls medium redundancy in an OSM ring
OSM Optical Switch Module
Industrial Ethernet network component with switch functionality
Path Variability Value (PVV)
The variability value of a component describes the fluctuations in the propagation
time of a data packet through a network component. The path variability value is
the sum of all the fluctuations through all the network components between two
nodes.
Redundancy
This means that standby equipment exists that is not required for the basic functio-
ning of a system. If equipment fails, the standby can take over its function.
Example:
Medium redundancy:
An additional link closes the bus to form a ring. If there is a failure on part of the bus,
the redundant link is activated to maintain the functionality of the network.
Reference potential
The voltages of circuits are considered and/or measured relative to this potential.
Glossary
Glossary-7
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
RJ-45 Connector for data lines also known as the Western plug. Commonly used
connector in telephone and ISDN systems. This connector is also used in LAN
installations in offices.
Router Active network component that controls data traffic based on the IP address.
Routers have a wide range of filtering and data management functions.
Segment In triaxial networks, the transceivers connected together via 727-0 LAN cables
and the nodes connected by 727-1 drop cables form a segment.
Several such segments can be connected via repeaters.
When using twisted pair and fiber-optic cables, each subsection forms a
segment.
Segmentation
Disconnection of a faulty segment from an Ethernet network. With this function,
network components such as OLMs, ELMs, ASGEs are capable of limiting faults
to a segment.
Shared LANAll components in a shared LAN operate at the nominal data rate. Shared LANs
are structured with repeaters/hubs.
Shield impedance
Resistance to alternating current of the cable shield. Shield impedance is a cha-
racteristic of the cable used and is normally specified by the manufacturer.
Signal propagation time
The time required by a data packet to on its way through the network.
Spanning Tree Protocol
Configuration protocol for bridges specified in the IEEE 802.1d standard.
Different ports in the bridges are switched to standby in meshed bridge
structures to prevent data packets from circulating in the network. The result is a
network with a tree structure. The standby ports/connections are available as
redundant connections if a fault develops. Reconfiguration of the network using
the spanning tree protocol can take from several seconds up to a minute and is
therefore not suitable for industrial purposes.
Glossary
Glossary-8 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
S/STP Screened Shielded Twisted Pair
With this cable design, the individual twisted pairs of a twisted pair cable are
wrapped in a foil screen. Both individually screened pairs are also shielded with a
common braided copper shield.
Standard rail
Metal rail standardized in compliance with EN 50 022.
The standard rail is used for fast snap-on installation of suitably designed devi-
ces (for example OLM, ELM, OSM)
Structured cabling
Generic cabling system within buildings and building complexes for information
technology purposes. The European standard EN 50173 “Application
Independent Generic Cabling Systems” contains specifications.
This divides a campus into the following areas
– Primary area (connections between buildings of a campus)
– Secondary area (connections between floors of a building)
– Tertiary area (connections to the DTEs).
EN 50173 recommends cabling systems adapted to these areas that provide the
flexibility for the communication requirements of the future independent of
specific applications.
Suppressor
Component for reducing induced voltages. Induced voltages occur when circuits
with inductances are turned off.
Switch, Switching
A switch is a network component with essentially the same characteristics as a
bridge. In contrast to bridges, however, the switch can establish multiple
connections between its ports simultaneously. These connections are
established dynamically and temporarily depending on the data traffic. Each
connection has the full nominal bandwidth.
Terminating resistor
A resistor to terminate Industrial Ethernet triaxial cable; terminating resistors are
always necessary at the ends of triaxial cable.
TP cord A category 5 twisted pair cable for short links; intended for use in a wiring closet
or in an office environment with low levels of electromagnetic interference.
Glossary
Glossary-9
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Triaxial cable
The SIMATIC NET LAN cable 727-0 is based on the coaxial cable specified in
the IEEE 802.3: 10BASE5 standard but with a solid aluminum shield and outer
sheath making it more suitable for industrial application.
Twisted pairData cable with twisted pairs of wires. Twisting the wire pairs minimizes the
electromagnetic interference between the pairs. Twisted pair cables are available
in different qualities for different transmission rates.
Glossary
Glossary-10 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Glossary-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Abbreviations
ACR
Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio, difference between near end crosstalk and attenuation
in dB
APX
Automatic Polarity Exchange
ASGE
Name of an active star coupler for Industrial Ethernet
AS-Interface
Actuator–Sensor–Interface, bus system for direct attachment of simple binary
sensors and actuators
AUI
Attachment Unit Interface, term from the IEEE 802.3 standard
BFOC
Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector, international designation for fiber–optic
connectors
BN
Bonding Network
BT
Bit Times
CATx
Category (cable category assigned according to transmission characteristics)
CBN
Common Bonding Network
CP
Communications Processor
CSMA/CD
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection, bus access method
complying with IEEE 802.3
DIN
Deutsches Institut für Normung (German Standards Institute)
Abbreviations
Glossary-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
ECTP3
Name of an Industrial Twisted Pair interface card for the ASGE star coupler
ECFL2/4
Name of a fiber-optic interface card for the ASGE star coupler
ELM
Electrical Link Module
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN
EuroNorm Standard
ESM
Electrical Switch Module
FDX
Full Duplex
FO
Fiber Optic
FRNC
Flame retardant non corrosive
HDX
Half Duplex
HSSM 2
Name of a signaling card for the ASGE star coupler
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IK PI
Industrial Communication Catalog (SIMATIC NET product catalog)
ISO
International Standardization Organization
ITP
Industrial Twisted Pair
Abbreviations
Glossary-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
L+
Positive dc current conductor
L–
Negative dc current conductor
LAN
Local Area Network
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LLC
Logical Link Control, layer 2b of the OSI reference model
MAC
Media Access Control
MAU
Medium Attachment Unit
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface
MESH–BN
MESHed Bonding Network]
MIKE
Name of a management interface card for the ASGE star coupler
Mini OTDE
Name of an optical transceiver for Industrial Ethernet
Mini UTDE
Name of an electrical transceiver for Industrial Ethernet
N
Neutral conductor
NEXT
Near End Cross Talk
OLM
Optical Link Module
OSI
Open System Interconnection, abstract model describing communication between
open systems according to ISO 7498
Abbreviations
Glossary-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
OSM
Optical Switch Module
PE
Protective Earth conductor
PELV
Protective extra–low Voltage
PEN
Combined protective conductor and neutral conductor
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PP
Polypropylene
PUR
Polyurethane
PVC
Polyvinyl chloride
PVV
Path Variability Value
SELV
Safety extra–low voltage
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SQE
Signal Quality Error (”heartbeat”), signal for checking the functionality of a
transceiver
S/STP
Screened Shielded Twisted Pair
VDE
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers)
Index-1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Index
Numbers
100 Mbps switched LAN
configuration, 3-24, 3-27
fiber-optic links, 3-27
100 Mbps switched LAN (electrical), 3-24
100 Mbps switched LAN (optical), 3-27
100BASE-FX, 3-27
100BASE-FX (fiber-optic cable), 2-7
100BASE-TX (Twisted Pair), 2-7
15-pin sub-D connector, 9-12
9-pin sub-D connector, 9-11
A
ASGE, 9-9
ASGE star coupler, 6-24
AUI links, 3-5
B
BFOC connector, 7-39
BFOC connectors, 5-15
Bus cables, 7-2, 7-23
electrical safety , 7-3
electromagnetic compatibility, 7-5
EMC, 7-5
handling bus cables, 7-2
in plants, 7-2
mechanical protection, 7-23
C
Cabinet lighting, EMC, 7-17
Cable categories, 7-19
Cable shielding, 7-14
Cabling, 7-21
outside buildings, 7-22
within buildings, 7-21
within closets, 7-21
Collision domain, 2-4, 3-5, 6-19
Configuring networks, 3-1
Creating and linking subnets, 6-19
CSMA/CD protocol, 2-4
CSMA/CDCSMA/CD networks, 3-2
D
Delay equivalent, 3-5
values, 3-7
Devices and cables, arrangement, 7-18
E
Electrical 100 Mbps switched LAN, 3-24
Electrical Link Module, dimension drawing, 9-2
Electrical Switch Module, 9-6
Electrical Switch Module (ESM), 6-11
Electrical transceiver, 9-10
ELM, 6-2, 9-2
ESM, 9-6
outer dimensions and clearance for
installing, 9-8
F
Fast Ethernet, 2-6
FC Outlet RJ-45, 9-14
Fiber optic (10BASE-FL), 2-5
Fiber-optic cable (FO), 5-2
Fiber-optic links, 3-2
Index
Index-2 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
Fiber-optic standard cable, 5-4, 5-7
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable, 5-5, 5-9
FO link power budget, 3-2
G
Glass fiber-optic cable, 3-4, 5-3
technical specifications, 5-4
I
INDOOR fiber-optic cable, 5-4, 5-8
Industrial Twisted Pair, 4-19
Industrial Twisted Pair (10BASE-T), 2-5
Industrial Twisted Pair links, 3-4
Industrial Twisted Pair standard cable, 4-4
labeling, 4-5, 4-16
structure, 4-4
technical specifications, 4-6, 4-11
Industrial Twisted Pair sub-D connector, 4-34
15-pin, 4-36
9-pin, 4-35
Industrial twisted-pair standard cable, ordering
data, 4-14
Installation instructions , for electrical and
optical LAN cables, 7-26
Interference voltages, 7-6
counter measures, 7-6
Interframe gap, 3-6
M
Mini OTDE, 9-10
MINI OTDE Optical Transceiver, 9-10
MINI OTDE optical transceiver, 6-26
functions, 6-27
topologies with the MINI OTDE, 6-27
Mini UTDE RJ-45, 9-10
N
Network expansion, 6-19
Network span, 3-5
Networking bus cables, instructions, 7-2
Noise suppression measures, 7-17
O
OLM, 6-2, 9-2
Optical Link Module, dimension drawing, 9-2
Optical power loss, 3-3
Optical Switch Module, dimension drawing, 9-3
Optical Switch Module (OSM), 6-11
bus topologies, 6-15
casing, 6-12
functions, 6-13
installation, 6-12
ports, 6-12
OSM, 3-29, 3-30, 9-3
bus structure, 3-29
redundant ring structure, 3-30
P
Path variability value, 3-6
Preassembled cables, 7-39
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables,
4-20
pinout, 4-23
product range, 4-21, 4-24
Preassembled TP cables, 4-19
use, 4-19
PVV, 3-6
R
Redundant link, network segments with
OSMs/ESMs, 3-31
Redundant links with the OSM/ESM, 6-20
Redundant ring structure with OLMs, 3-16
RJ-45 connector, 4-37, 9-13
S
Shield contact, making, 7-15
SIENOPYR duplex fiber-optic marine cable,
5-5, 5-12
Signal delay, 3-5
Signal propagation time, 3-5
SIMATIC NET, 1-5
Special cables, 5-14
Standby-sync mode, 6-21
Standby-sync ports, 6-20
Star coupler , active , 9-9
Storage and transportation, 7-26
Switched LANs, 3-23
Switching, 2-8
Index
Index-3
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
T
Temperatures, 7-26
Tensile strength, 7-26
Twisted-pair connectors, 7-29
fitting, 7-29
Twisted-Pair Cord, technical specifications,
4-17
Twisted-pair port converter, 4-32
mounting bracket, 4-32
pinout, 4-33
product range, 4-32
V
Variability value, 3-6, 3-7
W
Western plug, 4-37
Index
Index-4 SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
1
SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
$
Siemens AG
A&D PT2
Postfach 4848
D–90327 Nürnberg
Federal Republic of Germany
Please check any industry that applies to you:
rAutomotive
rChemical
rElectrical Machinery
rFood
rInstrument and Control
rNonelectrical Machinery
rPetrochemical
rPharmaceutical
rPlastic
rPulp and Paper
rTextiles
rTransportation
rOther ___________
From:
Your Name: _____________________________
Your Title: _____________________________
Company Name: __________________________
Street: __________________________
City, Zip Code__________________________
Country: __________________________
Phone: __________________________
2SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
C79000-G8976-C125-02
If you encountered any specific problems, please explain below:
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
Remarks Form
Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness
of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire
and return it to Siemens.
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range
from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents meet your requirements?
2. Is the information you need easy to find?
3. Is the text easy to understand?
4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?
5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:
